Section 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE - cdconline CURRENT/APEX DENTAL/ADDENDUM 2/FUL… · K. Vapor Retarder: ... BASF Construction Chemicals ... to 100 mm) before adding highrange

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah PROJECT TITLE PAGE

000101 - 1

DOCUMENT 000101 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE

PROJECT MANUAL

APEX Dental Practices Facility APEX Dental Sandy, Utah Architect Project No. 13.014

Chris Layton & Associates 2005 E 2700 S Suite 200 Salt Lake City, Utah 84109 Phone: 801.487.0715 Fax: 801.487.0716 Web Site: www.claarchitects.com Issued: 10.15.2013 Copyright © 2013 Chris Layton & Associates. All rights reserved.

END OF DOCUMENT 000101

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

000115 - 1

DOCUMENT 000115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

1.1 LIST OF DRAWINGS

A. Drawings: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled APEX Dental Practices Facility, dated <Insert date>, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract modifications.

B. List of Drawings: Drawings consist of the following Contract Drawings and other drawings of type indicated:

1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, drawing numbers and titles. For other than Contract Drawings, include the words "Resource Drawing" or "For information" after the title>.

END OF DOCUMENT 000115

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Submittals: concrete mix designs .

B. Ready-Mixed Concrete Producer Qualifications: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," and with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, as drawn, flat sheet.

C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II.

D. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

E. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

F. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

G. Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded, with at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal.

H. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

I. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, water reducing and accelerating and water reducing and retarding. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

J. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures.

1. Manufacturers:[ One of the following:]

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6285&mf=04&src=wd�


a. ChemMasters. b. Davis Colors. c. Dayton Superior Corporation. d. Hoover Color Corporation. e. Lambert Corporation. f. QC Construction Products. g. Rockwood Pigments NA, Inc. h. Scofield, L. M. Company. i. Solomon Colors, Inc. j. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

K. Vapor Retarder: Reinforced sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A.

1. Products:[ One of the following:]

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.; Blackline 400. b. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; Moistop [Ultra 15] [Ultra 10]. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Florprufe 120. d. Insulation Solutions, Inc.; Viper [VaporCheck 16] [VaporCheck 10]

[VaporCheck 6.5]. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; [Perminator 15 mil] [Perminator 10 mil]. f. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor [Block 15] [Block 10]. g. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn [Type-105] [Type-65G] [15 mil Green] [10 mil

Green]. h. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego [Wrap 15 mil Class A] [Wrap 10 mil Class A]. i. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

L. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces.


a. Advanced Floor Products; Retro-Plate 99. b. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; FGS Hardener Plus. c. QuestMark, a division of CentiMark Corporation; DiamondQuest Densifying

Impregnator Application. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

M. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

N. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

O. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV. b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456830831&mf=04&src=wd�


























c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV). e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear;

LusterSeal 300. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25. h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30. k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30. l. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315. n. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

P. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.


a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315. b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB. c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB. d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX;

LusterSeal WB 300. f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion. g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal. h. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus. i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30. j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30. k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30. l. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E. m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315. n. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

Q. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

2.3 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated in General Structural Notes at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: As indicated in General Structural

Notes. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50

to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture] plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).



























4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of floor slabs to receive troweled finishes to exceed 3 percent.

5. Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 25percent.

6. For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, limit use of fly ash to 25 percent replacement of portland cement by weight and granulated blast-furnace slag to 40 percent of portland cement by weight; silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight.

C. Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONCRETING

A. Construct formwork according to ACI 301 and maintain tolerances and surface irregularities within ACI 347R limits of Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for concrete exposed to view and Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for other concrete surfaces.

B. Place vapor retarder on prepared subgrade, with joints lapped 6 inches (150 mm) and sealed.

C. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

D. Install construction, isolation, and contraction joints where indicated. Install full-depth joint-filler strips at isolation joints.

E. Place concrete in a continuous operation and consolidate using mechanical vibrating equipment.

F. Protect concrete from physical damage, premature drying, and reduced strength due to hot or cold weather during mixing, placing, and curing.

G. Formed Surface Finish: Smooth-formed finish for concrete exposed to view, coated, or covered by waterproofing or other direct-applied material; rough-formed finish elsewhere.

H. Slab Finishes: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. Provide the following finishes:

1. Scratch finish for surfaces to receive mortar setting beds. 2. Float finish for surfaces to receive waterproofing, roofing, or other direct-applied

material. 3. Troweled finish for floor surfaces and floors to receive floor coverings, paint, or other

thin film-finish coatings. 4. Trowel and fine-broom finish for surfaces to receive thin-set tile. 5. Nonslip-broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps.

I. Cure formed surfaces by moisture curing for at least seven days.


J. Begin curing concrete slabs after finishing. [Keep concrete continuously moist for at least seven days] [Apply membrane-forming curing compound to concrete] [Apply membrane-forming curing and sealing compound to concrete].

K. Polished Concrete Floor Treatment: Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs.

1. Machine grind floor surfaces level and smooth[ and to depth required to reveal aggregate].

2. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Continue polishing with progressively finer polishing pads to gloss level required. 4. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.

L. Owner will engage a testing agency to perform field tests and to submit test reports.

M. Protect concrete from damage. Repair and patch defective areas.

END OF SECTION 033000

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Shop Drawings and mill test reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent.

B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M .

C. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M .

D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M .

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B , structural tubing.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

B. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: As indicated. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant, factory packaged.

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

C. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces according to SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning"; or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." Shop prime steel to a dry film thickness of at least 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Do not prime surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar or to be field welded.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.

C. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

D. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

E. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened .

F. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: ICC-ES evaluation reports for [wood-preservative treated wood] [fire-retardant treated wood] [engineered wood products] [shear wall panels] [and] [metal framing anchors] [as applicable and where called out in the drawings].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Wood-based materials [ produced from tropical forests] shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

B. Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.

C. Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Engineered wood products shall have allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be demonstrated by comprehensive testing.

2.2 TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative-Treated Materials: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground].

1. Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium.[ Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.]

2. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 3. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC

Board of Review.

B. Provide preservative-treated materials for [items indicated on Drawings, and the following:]

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.


2. Wood sills, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A unless otherwise indicated. 3. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high-temperature fire-

retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with design adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 for modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.

4. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 5. Identify with appropriate classification marking of a testing and inspecting agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide fire-retardant treated materials for [items indicated on Drawings].

2.3 FRAMING

A. Certified Wood: Wood framing shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

B. Dimension Lumber:

1. Maximum Moisture Content: [15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness].

2. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: [Construction or No. 2] [Northern species: NLGA;] [or] [Western woods: WCLIB or WWPA].

3. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: [No. 2] [Construction or No. 2] [Douglas fir-larch: WCLIB, or WWPA;] [Douglas fir-larch (north): NLGA;].

4. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane.

a. Species: As specified for framing other than non-load-bearing interior partitions. b. Grade: [Select Structural] . 1] [No. 2].

C. Not Used

D. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Manufactured with exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. Allowable design values determined according to ASTM D 5456.



a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific. c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. West Fraser Timber Co., Ltd. e. Weyerhaeuser Company.

2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: [2900 psi (20.0 MPa)] 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: [1,500,000 psi (10 300 MPa)] Unless otherwise

directed in the Structural Drawings.

E. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.


a. Boise Cascade Corporation. b. Georgia-Pacific. c. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. d. Weyerhaeuser Company.

2. Web Material: [Either oriented strand board or plywood, Exposure 1]. 3. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those

indicated. 4. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with nominal joist depth,

joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard.

F. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.

1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists. 2. Material: [All-veneer product]. 3. Thickness: [1 inch (25 mm)].

2.4 SHEAR WALL PANELS

A. Manufacturers:[ One of the following:]

B. Basis-of-Design Product: [Product and nail patterns indicated on Structural Drawings] or a comparable product of one of the following:

1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. Weyerhaeuser Company.

C. Wood-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of wood perimeter framing, tie downs, and Exposure I, Structural I plywood or OSB sheathing.
















D. Steel-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of cold-formed galvanized steel panel, steel top and bottom plates, and wood studs.

E. Allowable Design Loads: Shear wall panels shall have allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be demonstrated by comprehensive testing.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Miscellaneous Dimension Lumber: [Construction, or No. 2] grade with [15] percent maximum moisture content of any species. Provide for nailers, blocking, and similar members.

B. Not Used

C. Concealed Boards: [Western woods, Standard: WCLIB; or No. 3 Common: WWPA;] with [15] percent maximum moisture content.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, [Exterior, AC], fire-retardant treated, not less than [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal thickness.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners [with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M].

1. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 2. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property

Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

B. Metal Framing Anchors: Structural capacity, type, and size indicated.

1. Manufacturers:[ One of the following:] 2. Basis-of-Design Product: [Product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product of

one of the following:

a. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. b. KC Metals Products, Inc. c. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. e. USP Structural Connectors.

3. Use anchors made from hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.








4. Use anchors made from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 for exterior locations and where indicated.

C. Sill Sealer: [Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick].

D. Flexible Flashing: Self-adhesive product consisting of a [butyl rubber] [or] [rubberized-asphalt] compound, bonded to a backing sheet to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

D. Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following:

1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. [Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the IBC].


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: ICC-ES evaluation reports for [preservative-treated plywood] [fire-retardant-treated plywood].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.

C. Certified Wood: Wood-based materials[ produced from tropical forests] shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

2.2 TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative-Treated Plywood: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2.

1. Use treatment containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

B. Provide preservative-treated plywood for [items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing].

C. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A unless otherwise indicated. 3. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span

ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified.

4. Identify with appropriate classification marking of a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


D. Provide fire-retardant-treated plywood for [all plywood] [items indicated on Drawings].

2.3 WALL SHEATHING [Refer to Structural Drawings and Schedules]

A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: [Exterior, Structural I] sheathing.

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: [Exposure 1, Structural I] sheathing.

C. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, gypsum sheathing; with water-resistant-treated core.


a. American Gypsum. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation. c. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co.

D. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: [If Applicable]


a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP. d. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass. e. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A. [If Applicable]


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

F. Not Used

G. Not Used

2.4 ROOF SHEATHING [Refer to Structural Drawings]

A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: [Exterior, Structural I] sheathing.

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: [Exposure 1, Structural I] [Exposure 1] sheathing.


a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.




















b. Cornell Corporation. c. Dow Chemical Company (The). d. Johns Manville; Berkshire Hathaway Inc. e. Rmax, Inc. f. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

C. Composite Nail Base Insulated Roof Sheathing: Polyisocyanurate foam with oriented strand board laminated to one face complying with ASTM C 1289, Type V.

2.5 Not Used

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Fasteners: Size and type indicated.

1. For roof[ and wall] sheathing, provide fasteners[ with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M].

2. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

B. Sheathing Joint-and-Penetration Treatment Materials:

1. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant, recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for application indicated.

2. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Self-adhering, glass-fiber tape recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for application indicated.

3. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing.

C. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: APA AFG-01.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Securely attach to substrates, complying with the following:

1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. [Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the IBC].

B. Fastening Methods:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. [Nail] [Nail or staple] to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.

C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Joint-and-Penetration Treatment: Seal sheathing joints and penetrations according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.






D. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 1

SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data including specifications and installation instructions, ICC-ES evaluation reports for [structural glued-laminated timber], and Shop Drawings showing full dimensions of each member[ and layout of entire structural glulam system]. Show large-scale details of connections.

1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

B. Comply with AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit, Storage, and Erection."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Provide structural glulam timber capable of withstanding design loads indicated according to AITC 117 or as determined according to ASTM D 3737.

2.2 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED UNITS

A. Standards: Comply with ANSI/AITC A 190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated Timber."[ Factory mark with AITC Quality Mark ]

B. Certified Wood: Structural glued-laminated timber shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

C. Species: [Douglas fir].

D. Species and Beam Stress Classification for [Beams] [Douglas fir-larch or southern pine, 24F-1.8E].

1. Lay up: [Balanced].

E. Species and Beam Stress Classification for Arches: [Douglas fir-larch or southern pine, 24F-1.8E].

1. Lay up: [Balanced].

F. Species and Grades for Columns: [Douglas fir-larch, 1;].

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 2

G. Appearance: [Framing] grade.

H. Adhesive: Wet-use adhesive complying with AITC A190.1.

I. End-Cut Sealing: After end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces.

J. Seal Coat: After fabricating and sanding each unit, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit.

K. Wiped Stain Finish: Manufacturer's standard, dry-appearance, penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; oven dried and resistant to mildew and fungus.

L. Clear Finish: Manufacturer's standard, two-coat, clear varnish finish; resistant to mildew and fungus.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. General: Fabricate from structural steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M; steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020; and steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. Finish with rust-inhibitive primer.

B. Beam Seats: 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) bearing plates, 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter-by-12-inch- (300-mm-) long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239-inch (6-mm) side plates.

C. Arch Base Shoes: 1-inch (25-mm) base plates and 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) side plates.

D. Purlin Hangers: 0.179-inch (4.6-mm) stirrups and 0.239-inch (6-mm) top plates.

E. Hinge Connectors: 0.179-inch (4.6-mm) side plates and 1-inch (25-mm) top and bottom plates.

F. Tie Rods: Round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged-steel turnbuckles.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install structural glued-laminated timber for a close fit and neat appearance of joints. Carefully trim ends to fit connectors, mark and drill for bolts, and seal cuts with end sealer.

B. Handle and temporarily support members to prevent visible surface damage. When hoisting members into place, use padded slings, and protect corners with wood blocking.

C. Brace members as they are placed to maintain safe condition until full stability is provided.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 - 1

SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Samples for [siding] [hardboard paneling] [and] [moldings and trim].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Certified Wood: Wood-based materials produced from tropical forests shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

2.2 Not Required

2.3 Not Required

A. Interior Hardwood Lumber Trim: Clear, kiln-dried, [red oak to be Stained]

2.4 Not Required

2.5 Not Required

2.6 Not Required

2.7 Not Required

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: [Stainless-steel] [hot-dip galvanized steel] [or] [aluminum].

B. Glue: Aliphatic-resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer.

1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less. 2. Use waterproof resorcinol glue for exterior applications.

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah FINISH CARPENTRY 062000 - 2

C. Adhesive for Cellular PVC Trim: Product recommended by trim manufacturer.

D. Installation Adhesive for Foam Plastic Moldings: Product recommended for indicated use by foam plastic molding manufacturer.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

E. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: [Aluminum] [PVC-coated glass-fiber fabric] [Stainless steel].

F. Continuous Soffit Vents: Aluminum hat channel shape with stamped louvers or perforations.

G. Round Soffit Vents: [Stamped aluminum] [Molded plastic] louvered vents, [2 inches (51 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)] <Insert dimension> in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Condition interior finish carpentry in installation areas for 24 hours before installing.

B. Prime and backprime lumber for painted finish exposed on the exterior. Cut to length and prime ends.

C. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts.

1. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.

D. Install standing and running trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related trim. Cope at returns and inside corners and miter at outside corners.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK 064100 - 1

SECTION 064100 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: [Shop Drawings].

B. Fabricator Qualifications: .

C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

D. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: AWI, AWMAC, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

B. Certified Wood: Wood-based materials[ produced from tropical forests] shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

C. NOT REQUIRED

D. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: [Premium] [Custom] [Economy] grade.

1. Type of Construction: [Frameless]. 2. Cabinet and Door and Drawer Front Interface Style: [Flush overlay]. 3. Laminate Cladding: Horizontal surfaces other than tops, [Grade HGS]; postformed

surfaces, Grade HGP; vertical surfaces, [Grade HGS]; edges, [Grade HGS]. 4. Drawer Sides and Backs: [Solid hardwood]. 5. Drawer Bottoms: [Hardwood plywood].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood Moisture Content: [5 to 10] percent.

B. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130[, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde].


C. Particleboard: [ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2] [ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde] [Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements of ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density].

D. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1[, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde].

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows:

1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361. 2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, [100] degrees of opening.

C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid [metal], [4 inches (100 mm) long, 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter].

D. Catches: [Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141].

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: [BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081].

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; [metal].

G. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.

1. Box Drawer Slides: [Grade 1HD-100]. 2. File Drawer Slides: [Grade 1HD-100]. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: [Grade 2].

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Comply with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.

1. Finish: [Dark Satin Bronze: BHMA 613].

J. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: [Softwood] lumber, kiln dried to 15 percent moisture content.





2.4 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

2.5 NOT REQUIRED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Install cabinets to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush.

F. Cabinets: Install so doors and drawers are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.

1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with [No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips].


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WOOD TRIM 064600 - 1

SECTION 064600 - WOOD TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section includes standing and running trim, jambs, and frames.

B. Submittals: [Samples showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish].

C. Fabricator Qualifications: .

D. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

E. Environmental Limitations for Interior Wood Trim: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until building is enclosed, wet work is completed, and HVAC system is operating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD TRIM

A. Quality Standard: AWI, AWMAC, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

B. Certified Wood: Wood[ produced from tropical forests] shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

C. Interior Trim for Transparent Finish: [Premium] [Custom] [Economy] grade, made from [red oak] [quarter cut/quarter sawn].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Wood Moisture Content for Exterior Woodwork: [9 to 15] percent.

B. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Woodwork: [5 to 10] percent.

C. Particleboard: [ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2].

D. Blocking and Shims: [Softwood] lumber, kiln dried.

E. Water-Repellent Preservative-Treated Materials: Comply with AWPA N1 (dip, spray, flood, or vacuum-pressure treatment) for woodwork items indicated to receive water-repellent preservative treatment.

F. Fasteners for Exterior Wood Trim:


1. Nails: [Aluminum]. 2. Screws: [Aluminum].

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

2.4 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime wood trim for opaque finish with one coat of specified wood primer.

B. Backprime with one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats.[ Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.]

2.5 SHOP FINISHING OF INTERIOR WOOD TRIM

A. Finishes: Same grades as items to be finished.

B. Shop finish transparent-finished interior wood trim at fabrication shop. Colors to be selected by the architect from actual samples.

1. Apply one coat of sealer or primer to concealed surfaces of wood trim.[ Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.]

2. Apply a wash coat sealer to wood trim made from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.

3. After staining, if any, apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood.

C. Transparent Finish: 1. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 2. Sheen: [Satin].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Install wood trim to comply with referenced quality standard for grade specified.


C. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Fasten with countersunk concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

F. Exterior Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches (900 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

G. Interior Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than [36 inches (900 mm)] [60 inches (1500 mm)] [96 inches (2400 mm)] long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data[ and ICC-ES evaluation reports for foam-plastic insulation].

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: According to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTS

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type IV], with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively.


a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products.

B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, [Type I], with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively.

1. Manufacturers:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Plymouth Foam, Inc.

C. Glass-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, [Type III, Class A, foil faced on one side] with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively. [At exterior walls]


a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Guardian Building Products, Inc. c. Johns Manville. d. Knauf Insulation. e. Owens Corning. f. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
















2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Sheet Radiant Barrier: If directed by drawings, ASTM C 1313, [vacuum metallized], flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, and water-vapor transmission of [1 perm, maximum].

1. Products:

a. Fi-Foil Company; Radiant Shield. b. Innovative Energy, Inc.; R+Heatshield [Commercial Solid] [Perforated]. c. Innovative Insulation, Inc.; Super R [Premium] [Plus]. d. TVM Building Products; Reflective [House Wrap] [Vapor Barrier].

B. Vapor Retarder: [Polyethylene], [6 mils (0.15 mm)] thick.

1. Products:

a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.

C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross-ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R-values indicated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation.

B. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

C. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

D. Except for loose-fill insulation and insulation that is friction fitted in stud cavities, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

E. Place loose-fill insulation to comply with ASTM C 1015.

1. Comply with the CIMA's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."

F. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is completed and items not indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of studs.










G. Install sheet radiant barriers according to ASTM C 1158.

H. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage. Locate seams at framing members, overlap, and seal with tape. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items with tape.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 1

SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: [ICC-ES evaluation reports] [and] [Samples of finishes].

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Master Wall, Inc. 3. Sto Corp. 4. Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc. 5. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS components from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system.

2.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. System is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on evaluation per ICC-ES AC235, "Acceptance Criteria for EIFS Clad Drainage Wall Assemblies."

1. System complies with optional requirements for [fire-resistance-rated construction].

B. Impact Classification: [Standard] Impact Resistance per EIMA 101.86.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Water-Resistive Coating: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC-ES AC212.

B. Drainage Mat: [Three-dimensional plastic mat] designed to drain moisture by gravity.

C. Spacers: [Closed-cell PE] strips.







D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use and compatible with substrate.

E. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I, complying with EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board."

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other system materials, complying with ASTM D 578, and with minimum weight not less than [4.0 oz./sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m)] [10 oz./sq. yd. (339 g/sq. m)] [12.0 oz./sq. yd. (407 g/sq. m)].

1. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [15 oz./sq. yd. (509 g/sq. m)]. 2. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than [20 oz./sq. yd. (678 g/sq. m)].

G. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and polymer-emulsion adhesive designed for use indicated.

H. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating, consisting of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers.

I. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener.

J. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints,[ at window sills,] and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.

C. [Mechanically] apply [drainage mat] over water-/weather-resistive barrier according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. [mechanically] attach insulation to substrate to comply with ASTM C 1397 and with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements.

E. Install base coat with a minimum total thickness at least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), and completely covering reinforcing mesh so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.

1. Where indicated, apply second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.


2. Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.

F. Apply finish coat over dry base coat, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform color and texture, free of variations.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: ICC-ES evaluation reports for water-resistive barrier.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIERS

A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.

B. Building Paper: Kraft building paper with not less than 50 lbf/in. (8700 N/m) tensile strength, 1-hour water resistance, and 75 g/sq. m x 24 h water-vapor transmission.

C. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with water-vapor permeance not less than [5 perms (287 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] [10 perms (574 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] [25 perms (1436 ng/Pa x s x sq. m)] per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A); flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes not greater than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Products:

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap. b. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek [CommercialWrap]

[StuccoWrap] [HomeWrap] [HomeWrap and HeaderWrap]. c. Ludlow Coated Products; [Air Stop Housewrap] [Barricade Building Wrap]

[EnergyWrap Housewrap] [R-Wrap Protective House Wrap]. d. Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard [Classic Wrap] [RainDrop] [Ultra Wrap] [Value Wrap]. e. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Pro Weather Protective Barrier. f. Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Flexible Flashing: Adhesive [butyl rubber] [or] [rubberized-asphalt] compound, bonded to plastic film or spunbonded polyolefin, with an overall thickness of 0.030 inch (0.8 mm).

1. Products:

a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); DuPont Flashing Tape. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Vycor Butyl

Self Adhered Flashing. c. Protecto Wrap Company; BT-25 XL. d. Raven Industries Inc.; Fortress Flashshield.
















APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2

e. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Wind-o-wrap. f. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. g. Fiberweb, Clark Hammerbeam Corp.; Aquaflash 500. h. Fortifiber Building Systems Group; [Fortiflash 25] [Fortiflash 40]. i. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; [Vycor Plus

Self-Adhered Flashing] [Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing]. j. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. k. Polyguard Products, Inc.; [Polyguard JT-20 Tape] [Polyguard JT-30 Tape]. l. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Presto-Seal.

B. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Building Paper Installation:

1. Apply building paper immediately after sheathing is installed. 2. Apply horizontally with a 2-inch (50-mm) overlap and a 6-inch (150-mm) end lap. 3. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 4. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with [tape].

B. Building Wrap Installation:

1. Apply building wrap immediately after sheathing is installed. 2. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with building wrap tape. 3. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with building wrap tape.

C. Flexible Flashing Installation:

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 3 inches (75 mm), except that at

flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.











APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1

SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data[, Shop Drawings,] and color Samples.

B. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL WALL PANELS

A. Manufacturers:

1. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

B. Wall Panel Type: [Concealed-fastener, lap-seam] metal wall panels.

1. Manufacturers: 2. Basis of Design Product: [Product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product of

one of the following: a. Old Country Millwork, INC. Color: Running Rustic Ridge

C. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.

D. Provide components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor panels securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. Install panels with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Where exposed, use fasteners finished to match wall panels.

1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

2. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

B. Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants as indicated, or as recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Separate dissimilar metals and metal panels from contact with wood or cementitious materials, by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent separation.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: [ICC-ES evaluation reports for components of membrane roofing system].

B. Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form or customized, without monetary limitation, signed by roofing manufacturer agreeing to repair leaks due to defects in materials or workmanship for period of [10] years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Energy Performance: Initial Solar Reflectance not less than 0.70 and Thermal Emittance not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

B. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, [Class A].

2.2 ROOFING MATERIALS

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Firestone Building Products Company. c. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.

2. Thickness: [45 mils (1.1 mm)]. 3. Exposed Face Color: [Tan].

B. Auxiliary Materials: Recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and as follows:

1. Sheet Flashing: Unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, [55 mils (1.4 mm)] <Insert value> thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.

2. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard[, water based]. 3. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric,

water permeable and resistant to UV degradation.





APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 2

2.3 ROOF INSULATION

A. [Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV]

2.4 NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install substrate board with long joints continuous and perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered. Tightly butt substrate boards together[ and fasten to steel deck].

B. [Loosely lay insulation units].

C. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints continuous and perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered. Loosely butt cover boards together.

D. Install thermoplastic polyolefin sheet according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Adhered Sheet Installation: Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to splice area of sheet.

2. Mechanically Fastened Sheet Installation: Secure one edge of sheet using fastening plates or battens centered within the membrane splice and mechanically fasten sheet to roof deck.

E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

F. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

G. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

H. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings[ and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars].


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 1

SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data[, Shop Drawings,] [and] [color Samples].

B. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace roofing sheet metal that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Warranties: Standard form in which roofing Installer agrees to repair or replace sheet metal roofing that fails in materials or workmanship within [two] years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS

A. Energy Performance of Roofing Sheet Metal: Initial solar reflectance not less than [0.70] and emissivity not less than [0.75] when tested according to CRRC-1.

B. Solar Reflectance Index of Roofing Sheet Metal: Not less than [29] when calculated according to ASTM E 1980.

C. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, [0.032 inch (0.8 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.0 mm)] thick.

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard [two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight].

2. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, [Type II (No. 30)], asphalt-saturated organic felts.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Butyl or SBS-modified asphalt; slip-resisting-polyethylene surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) and passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C); ASTM D 1970.

1. Products:



a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High-Temperature Underlayment. f. FIRESTONE.

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.

D. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

2. Fasteners for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Copper: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel. 5. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated [Steel] Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

E. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50.

F. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

G. Solder for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

J. Metal Accessories: Matching sheet metal roofing in finish and material required for a complete weathertight roofing system, including clips, flashings, ridge closure strips, trim, copings, fasciae, gutters, and louvers.

K. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to use with sheet metal roofing and complete with predrilled holes or hooks for anchoring.

L. Seam-Mounted, Bar-Type Snow Guards: Rail-type assembly consisting of aluminum or stainless-steel bars or pipe held in place by stainless-steel clamps attached to vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal roofing.







2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate sheet metal roofing to comply with details shown and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of installation indicated.

1. Standing-Seam Roofing: Form standing-seam pans with finished seam height [of 1 inch

(25 mm)] [of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [as indicated] <Insert dimension>.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Apply self-adhering sheet underlayment at eaves and rakes from edges of roof to at least [24 inches (600 mm)] [36 inches (914 mm)] inside exterior wall line.

B. Apply self-adhering sheet underlayment at valleys extending 18 inches (450 mm) on each side.

C. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment.

D. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.

E. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Steel Roofing: For roofing with 3:12 slopes or less, paint underside of shop-coated, zinc-tin alloy-coated steel, before installation, with primer, applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils (0.06 mm).

F. Aluminum Roofing: Coat back side of roofing with bituminous coating where roofing will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

G. Anchor roofing securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

H. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or polymer-modified, bituminous sheet underlayment.

I. Install work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves, and avoidable tool marks, considering temper and reflectivity of metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. Fold back sheet metal to form a hem on concealed side of exposed edges unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install cleats to hold sheet metal panels in position. Attach each cleat with two fasteners to prevent rotation.

2. Nail cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Bend tabs over nails.

J. Seal joints as shown and as required for leakproof construction. Provide low-slope transverse seams using cleats where backup of moisture may occur.



APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

076200 - 1

SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data, [Samples].

B. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL

A. Copper: ASTM B 370; Temper H00 or H01, cold rolled, not less than 16 oz./sq. ft. (0.55 mm thick).

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required, not less than 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick; and [finished as:]

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard [two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight].

2. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, [Type II (No. 30)], asphalt-saturated organic felts.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Butyl or SBS-modified asphalt; slip-resisting-polyethylene surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) and passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C); ASTM D 1970.

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16-kg/sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.

D. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.


076200 - 2

2. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

3. Fasteners for Copper: Copper, hardware bronze, or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 5. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 6. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 7. Fasteners for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel or Series 300

stainless steel.

E. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50.

F. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.

G. Solder for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.

H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.

B. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. <Insert list of items required, identify sheet metal from which each is to be fabricated, and reference appropriate SMACNA plate number, if not detailed on Drawings>.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible.

B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.

C. Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams.[ For aluminum, form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.]


076200 - 3

D. Aluminum Flashing and Trim: Coat back side of aluminum flashing and trim with bituminous coating where it will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

E. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or polymer-modified, bituminous sheet underlayment.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ROOF SPECIALTIES

077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, Temper H00 or H01, cold rolled, mill finish.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required.

C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy and temper as recommended by manufacturer for use and finish indicated.

D. Aluminum Finish: [Mill finish] [Class I, clear anodic finish; complying with AAMA 611]

E. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, [Type II (No. 30)], asphalt-saturated organic felts.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant.

2.2 ROOF SPECIALTIES

A. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Provide [roof-edge flashings] tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressures:

B. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates.



a. Architectural Products Company. b. ATAS International, Inc. c. Castle Metal Products.






077100 - 2

d. Cheney Flashing Company. e. Hickman Company, W. P. f. Johns Manville. g. Merchant & Evans, Inc. h. Metal-Era, Inc. i. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. j. MM Systems Corporation. k. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. l. Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc. m. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.

C. Gutters and Downspouts:


a. Andreas Renner KG. b. Architectural Products Company. c. ATAS International, Inc. d. Berger Building Products, Inc. e. Castle Metal Products. f. Cheney Flashing Company. g. CopperCraft by FABRAL; a Euramax company. h. Hickman Company, W. P. i. Klauer Manufacturing Company. j. Merchant & Evans, Inc. k. Metal-Era, Inc. l. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC. m. MM Systems Corporation. n. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc. o. Perimeter Systems; a division of Southern Aluminum Finishing Company, Inc.

2. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths, with matching corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25 mm) above front edge. Furnish expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers.

a. Gutter Style: [Rectangular] [Ogee]. b. Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)]. c. Prepainted, Zinc-Coated Steel: [0.034 inch (0.86 mm)] thick. d. Gutter Supports: [Gutter brackets] [Spikes and ferrules] with finish matching

the gutters.

3. Downspouts: [Plain rectangular] with mitered elbows. Furnish wall brackets of same material and finish as downspouts, with anchors.

a. Formed Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] thick.




























077100 - 3

D. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces. Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge.

1. Formed Aluminum: [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)]

E. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches (100 mm) designed to snap into [reglets] [or] [through-wall-flashing receiver] and compress against base flashings with joints lapped.

1. Formed Aluminum: [0.024 inch (0.61 mm)] [0.032 inch (0.81 mm)] <Insert

dimension> thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

B. Coat back side of [aluminum] roof specialties with bituminous coating where they will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

C. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or polymer-modified, bituminous sheet underlayment.

D. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.

E. Space movement joints at a maximum of [12 feet] with no joints within [18 inches] of corners or intersections unless indicated.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding [50 feet] apart. Install expansion joint caps.

F. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate [wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws] [substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance].

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work.

H. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than [30 inches] apart. Attach ends with rivets and [seal with sealant] [solder] to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.


077100 - 4

I. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately [60 inches] o.c.

J. Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ROOF ACCESSORIES

077200 - 1

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275), or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel, ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 (AZM150).

1. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Coil-coated with manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish.[ Coil-coat finish as follows:]

1. Factory Prime Coating: Pretreatment and white or light-colored, factory-applied, baked-on epoxy primer coat; with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.2 mil (0.005 mm).

2. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm), medium gloss.

3. High-Performance Organic Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight.

2.2 ROOF ACCESSORIES

A. Roof Curbs and Equipment Supports: Fabricate from [0.052-inch- (1.32-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints] [0.079-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints] [0.090-inch- (2.28-mm-) thick aluminum with welded corner joints].

1. Manufacturers:[ One of the following:] 2. Basis-of-Design Product: [Product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's

name; product name or designation> or a comparable product of one of the following:

a. AES Industries, Inc. b. Curbs Plus, Inc. c. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products.






077200 - 2

d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. LM Curbs. f. Metallic Products Corp. g. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. h. Pate Company (The). i. Roof Products, Inc. j. Safe Air of Illinois. k. Thybar Corporation. l. Vent Products Co., Inc.

3. Provide units with cant strips and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness and roof deck slope. Equip units for sloping decks with water diverter.

4. Provide preservative-treated wood nailers at tops of curbs. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid insulation. 6. Finish: [Baked enamel].

B. Roof Hatches: Fabricate from [0.079-inch- (2.0-mm-) thick, metallic-coated steel] with 9-inch- (225-mm-) high, integral-curb, double-wall construction with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) insulation, formed cants and cap flashing, with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and corrosion-resistant hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles.

1. Manufacturers: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: [Product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product of


a. AES Industries, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. Bilco Company (The). d. Bristolite Skylights. e. Custom Solution Roof and Metal Products. f. Dur-Red Products. g. Hi Pro International, Inc. h. J. L. Industries, Inc. i. Metallic Products Corp. j. Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. k. Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The). l. Nystrom. m. O'Keeffe's Inc. n. Pate Company (The). o. Precision Ladders, LLC.

3. Fabricate units to withstand [40-lbf/sq. ft. (1.9-kPa)] external and [20-lbf/sq. ft. (0.95-kPa)] internal load.

4. Provide units with cant strips and base profile coordinated with roof insulation thickness and roof deck slope. Equip units for sloping decks with water diverter.

5. Finish: [Baked enamel]. 6. Options: Gravity ventilators are also called "static" or "relief vents."



























077200 - 3

C. Gravity Ventilators: [If required on this project. Refer to mechanical drawings]. Manufacturer's standard unit fabricated from the following materials, with manufacturer's standard welded or sealed mechanical joints, and integral base flange:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Active Ventilation Products, Inc. b. Air Vent, Inc.; a Gibraltar company. c. Dur-Red Products. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. Loren Cook Company. f. Metallic Products Corp. g. Safe Air of Illinois. h. Thaler Metal USA Inc. i. Vent Products Co., Inc.

2. Type: [Low-profile, cylindrical style]. 3. Material: [Aluminum]. 4. Finish: [Baked enamel]. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard bird screens.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Unless otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Coordinate with installation of roof deck, vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing, and flashing to ensure combined elements are secure, waterproof, and weathertight.












APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall comply with the following limits for VOC content:

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 3. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 4. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 5. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 6. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 7. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 8. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.

B. Low-Emitting Materials:

1. Exterior reactive sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L or 4 percent by weight, whichever is greater.

2. Other exterior caulks and sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 30 g/L or 2 percent by weight, whichever is greater.

3. Interior sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions.

D. Sealant for Use in Building Expansion Joints:

1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 50; for Use NT.

a. Products:



079200 - 2

1) BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. 2) Dow Corning Corporation; [756 SMS]. 3) GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; [SilGlaze II SCS2800]. 4) May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295. 5) Pecora Corporation; [864]. 6) Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641. 7) Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995. 8) Tremco Incorporated; [Spectrem 2].

2. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 100/50; for Use NT.

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; [790]. 2) GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 3) May National Associates, Inc.; [Bondaflex Sil 290]. 4) Pecora Corporation; [301 NS]. 5) Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. 6) Tremco Incorporated; [Spectrem 1].

E. Sealant for General Exterior Use Where Another Type Is Not Specified[, One of the Following]:

1. Single-component, nonsag polysulfide sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT.

a. Products:

1) Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elastoseal 230 Type I. 2) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Deck-O-Seal One Step.

2. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT.

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; 799. 2) GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; [UltraGlaze SSG4000]. 3) May National Associates, Inc.; [Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN]. 4) Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631. 5) Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. 6) Tremco Incorporated; [Proglaze SSG].

3. Single-component, nonsag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and for Use NT.

a. Products:

1) BASF Building Systems;.





























079200 - 3

2) Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk [900]. 3) May National Associates, Inc.; [Bondaflex PUR 25]. 4) Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II. 5) Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. 6) Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. 7) Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; [Permathane SM7100]. 8) Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a. 9) Tremco Incorporated; [Dymonic] [Vulkem 116]. 10) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

F. Sealant for Use in Interior Joints in Ceramic Tile and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures:

1. Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT; formulated with fungicide.

a. Products:

1) BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. 2) Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. 3) GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. 4) May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. 5) Pecora Corporation; 898. 6) Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

G. Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames:

1. Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

a. Products:

1) BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. 2) Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. 3) May National Associates, Inc.; [Bondaflex 600]. 4) Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 5) Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 6) Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

H. Acoustical Sealant:

1. Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90.

a. Products:

1) Pecora Corporation; [AC-20 FTR]. 2) USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.



























079200 - 4

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

D. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 1193.

B. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 10. Kewanee Corporation (The). 11. Mesker Door Inc. 12. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 13. Security Metal Products Corp. 14. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 15. Windsor Republic Doors.

B. Fire-Rated Doors and Frames: Labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. [Where indicated], provide doors that that have a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C).

C. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

D. Doors: Complying with SDI A250.8 for level and model and SDI A250.4 for physical-endurance level indicated, 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interior Doors: [Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty)]. 2. Exterior Doors: [Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty)], metallic-

coated steel sheet faces.


















081113 - 2

a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than [2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (0.370 K x sq. m/W)] when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets.

E. Frames: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated.

1. Steel Sheet for Interior Frames: [0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-)] [0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-)] minimum thickness.

2. Steel Sheet for Exterior Frames: [0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-)] [0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-)] minimum thickness.

3. Interior Frame Construction: [Knocked down]. 4. Exterior Frame Construction: [Full profile welded]. 5. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement

plates from same material as frames. 6. Frame Anchors: Not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

F. Glazing Stops: Nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors; screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

G. Door Louvers: [Sight] proof per SDI 111C. [Where applicable]

1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Actuated by fusible links and listed and labeled.

H. Door Silencers: Three on strike jambs of single-door frames and two on heads of double-door frames.

I. Grout Guards: Provide where mortar might obstruct hardware operation.

J. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115.

K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware.

L. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, free of scale, pitting, or surface defects.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180 or)A60 (ZF180).

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 4Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.


081113 - 3

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, sheet steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install hollow metal frames to comply with SDI A250.11.

1. Fire-Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80.

B. Install doors to provide clearances between doors and frames as indicated in SDI A250.11.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying rust-inhibitive primer.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah FLUSH WOOD DOORS

081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Samples for [factory-finished] [plastic-laminate-faced] doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers:

A. VT Industries Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A.

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. [Where indicated], provide doors that have a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C).

C. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

D. Certified Wood: Wood doors shall be certified as "FSC Pure" or "FSC Mixed Credit" according to FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD-40-004, "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification."

E. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

F. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:

1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Standard Duty: [Closets (not including janitor's closets)].

G. Particleboard-Core Doors: Provide[ blocking in particleboard cores or provide] structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors with [exit devices] [or] [protection plates].




081416 - 2

H. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. Provide the following for mineral-core doors:

1. Composite blocking where required to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 2. Laminated-edge construction. 3. Formed-steel edges and astragals for pairs of doors.

2.3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS

A. Doors for Transparent Finish:

1. Interior Solid-Core Doors: [Premium] grade, [five] -ply, [particleboard] cores.

a. Faces: Grade A [plain-sliced red oak]. b. Veneer Matching: [Book and balance] match. c. Pair matching. d. Continuous matching for doors with transoms.

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES [At Laundry Closet]

A. Louvers: [Wood louvers of same species as door faces].

B. Light Frames: Wood beads of [same species as] door faces.

2.5 FABRICATION AND FINISHING

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated and to comply with clearances specified.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3.

C. Cut and trim openings to comply with referenced standards.

1. Trim light openings with moldings indicated. 2. Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. 3. Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

D. Factory finish doors indicated for transparent finish with [stain and] manufacturer's standard finish complying with [WDMA TR-4, conversion varnish] for grade specified for doors.

1. Sheen: [Satin].

E. Factory finish doors indicated for opaque finish [Louvered Bi-Fold Doors] with manufacturer's standard finish complying with [WDMA OP-4, conversion varnish] for grade specified for doors.

1. Sheen: [Satin].


081416 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and WDMA I.S.1-A, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.

B. Align[ and fit] doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels.[ Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.]

C. Clearances: As follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. 2. 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. 3. 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

D. Repair, refinish, or replace factory-finished doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing per the following:

1. Vertical Access Doors: NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 2. Horizontal Access Doors and Frames: NFPA 288.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: [Product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product of one of the following:

1. Access Panel Solutions. 2. Acudor Products, Inc. 3. Alfab, Inc. 4. Babcock-Davis. 5. Cendrex Inc. 6. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Co.; Div. of Acorn Engineering Co. 7. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 8. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 9. Karp Associates, Inc. 10. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 11. Maxam Metal Products Limited. 12. Metropolitan Door Industries Corp. 13. MIFAB, Inc. 14. Milcor Inc. 15. Nystrom, Inc. 16. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

C. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: [Prime-painted steel] units with [drywall] bead flange.

D. Locks: Flush to finished surface, [screwdriver] [key] operated.


















APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

083113 - 2

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 591/A 591M.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60 (ZF180) or G60 (Z180) coating.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 directional satin finish.

D. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 5005-H15.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install access doors and panels accurately in position. Adjust hardware and door and panels for proper operation.

B. Install fire-rated access doors and panels according to NFPA 80.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples.

1. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

A. Manufacturers:


1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. CMI Architectural 3. Commercial Architectural Products, Inc. 4. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 5. Tubelite. 6. United States Aluminum. 7. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.

C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with ICC A117.1.

D. Performance Requirements:

1. Limit deflection of framing members normal to wall plane to 1/175 of clear span[ for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m)] or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Limit deflection of framing members parallel to glazing plane to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.

3. Structural Testing: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 at [150] percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures do not evidence material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding [0.2] percent of clear span.

4. Air Infiltration: Limited to [0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m)] of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of [1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa)] [6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)].

5. Water Penetration: Systems do not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of [20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)].










084113 - 2

6. Thermal Conductance: Average U-factor of not more than [0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.23 W/sq. m x K)] when tested according to AAMA 1503.

7. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Framing system and doors pass [basic] -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for [Wind Zone 2] when tested according to ASTM E 1886.

E. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) sheet; ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) extrusions.

F. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

H. Doors: 1-3/4-inch- (44.5-mm-) thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. Provide snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops, and preformed gaskets.

1. Door Design: [Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width]. 2. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm)

above floor or ground plane. 3. Interior Doors: Provide BHMA A156.16 silencers, three on strike jamb of single-door

frames and two on head of double-door frames. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other

locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.

5. Hardware: [As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."]

I. Fasteners and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware.

J. Fabrication: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

1. Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components.

K. Aluminum Finish: [Fluoropolymer two-coat coating system complying with AAMA 2604] [Duranar (PPG) Color is Dark Bronze].


084113 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible materials, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or primer, or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer.

B. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

D. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances:

1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length.

2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm).

E. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WINDOWS

085000 - 1

SECTION 085000 - WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Provide AAMA- or WDMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Manufacturers: [Refer to section 84113]

2.2 NOT REQUIRED

2.3 NOT REQUIRED

2.4 NOT REQUIRED

2.5 NOT REQUIRED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION [Refer to Section 84113-3.1]

A. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.

B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight construction.

C. Adjust operating panels, screens, and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

D. Clean glass [and aluminum] [and vinyl] [and fiberglass] surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces.

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WINDOWS

085000 - 2


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Allowances: Door hardware is included in Hardware Allowance.

B. Submittals: Hardware schedule[ and keying schedule as determined by owner (APEX DENTAL)].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HARDWARE

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide products that comply with NFPA 80 and are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications indicated. On exit devices provide label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware."

B. Hinges:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Baldwin Hardware Corporation. b. Bommer Industries, Inc. c. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. d. Hager Companies. e. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand company. f. Lawrence Hardware Inc. g. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. PBB, Inc. i. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.

2. [Brass/bronze] hinges with stainless-steel pins for exterior. 3. Nonremovable hinge pins for exterior and public interior exposure. 4. Ball-bearing hinges for doors with closers and entry doors. 5. Two hinges for 1-3/8-inch- (35-mm-) thick wood doors. 6. Three hinges for 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick doors 90 inches (2300 mm) or less in height;

four hinges for doors more than 90 inches (2300 mm) in height.

C. Locksets and Latchsets:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Accurate Lock & Hardware Co. b. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
















087100 - 2

d. Best Access Systems; Div. of Stanley Security Solutions, Inc. e. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. f. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; n ASSA ABLOY Group Company. g. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. h. Hager Companies. i. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. j. Marks USA. k. Medeco Security Locks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. l. PDQ Manufacturing. m. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. n. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand company. o. Weiser Lock Corp.; a Black & Decker Corp. company. p. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, [Grade 1] for bored locks and latches. 3. BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 for exit devices. 4. BHMA A156.5, [Grade 1] for auxiliary locks. 5. BHMA A156.12, Series 5000, [Grade 1] for interconnected locks and latches. 6. BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, [Grade 1] for mortise locks and latches. 7. [Lever handles] on locksets and latchsets. 8. Provide trim on exit devices matching locksets.

D. Key locks to Owner's [new] master-key system.

1. Cylinders with [six]-pin tumblers. 2. Provide cylinders for [storefront doors,] and other locking doors that do not require

other hardware. 3. Provide construction keying. 4. Provide key control system, including cabinet.

E. Closers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North

America. d. Dor-O-Matic; an Ingersoll-Rand company. e. K2 Commercial Hardware; a Black & Decker Corp. company. f. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand company. g. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. h. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. i. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. j. Yale Security Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.

2. Mount closers on interior side (room side) of door opening. Provide regular-arm, parallel-arm, or top-jamb-mounted closers as necessary.

3. Adjustable delayed opening (accessible to people with disabilities) feature on closers.

F. Provide wall stops or floor stops for doors without closers.



























087100 - 3

G. Hardware Finishes:

1. Hinges: [Matching finish of lockset/latchset]. 2. Locksets, Latchsets, and Exit Devices: [Oil-rubbed, oxidized bronze]. 3. Closers: [Matching finish of lockset/latchset]. 4. Other Hardware: Matching finish of lockset/latchset.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware in locations required to comply with governing regulations and according to SDI A250.8 and DHI WDHS.3.

B. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet.

C. Deliver keys to Owner.

3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE - [Refer to drawings A501 Hardware Schedule]


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah GLAZING

088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: [Product Data] [and] [Samples].

B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and

AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped

Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

C. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of [the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction]. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS, GENERAL

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide products that comply with NFPA 80 and are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications indicated.

B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. Provide safety glazing labeling where safety glass is indicated.

C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Glazing passes [basic] -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for [Wind Zone 2] when tested according to ASTM E 1886.


088000 - 2

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3. [Fully Tempered]

C. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

2.3 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear [float glass] [fully tempered float glass].

1. Thickness: [6.0 mm] [Unless noted otherwise on drawings]. 2. Provide safety glass.

2.4 NOT REQUIRED

2.5 NOT REQUIRED

A. Glass Type : Tinted insulating glass.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: [1 inch (25 mm)]. 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: [6.0 mm]. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted [float glass]. 4. Tint Color: [PPG Solar Bronze with clear interior lite]. 5. Interspace Content: [Air]. 6. Indoor Lite: Clear [float glass] [fully tempered float glass] [Where indicated to be

tempered on drawing and as per code]. 7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.47 maximum. 8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.50 maximum. 9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.51 maximum. 10. Provide safety glass.

2.6 NOT REQUIRED

2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; [UltraGlaze SSG4000]. c. May National Associates, Inc.; [Bondaflex Sil 200 GPN]. d. Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-631.







088000 - 3

e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. f. Tremco Incorporated; [Proglaze SSG].

B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual."

B. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

C. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation.




APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah MIRRORS

088300 - 1

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: [Product Data] [and] [Shop Drawings].

B. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:

1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MIRRORS, GENERAL

A. Manufacturers:

1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. 3. Binswanger Mirror; a division of Vitro America, Inc. 4. D & W Incorporated 5. Donisi Mirror Company. 6. Gardner Glass, Inc. 7. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. 8. Guardian Industries. 9. Head West. 10. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. 11. Lenoir Mirror Company. 12. Maran-Wurzell Glass & Mirror. 13. National Glass Industries. 14. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. 15. Sunshine Mirror; Westshore Glass Corp. 16. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. 17. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.

B. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503[; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process].

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Clear Glass: Mirror [Glazing] Quality, [6.0-mm] nominal thickness.




















088300 - 2

B. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.


a. Franklin International; Titebond Division. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. c. Macco Adhesives; Liquid Nails Division. d. OSI Sealants, Inc. e. Palmer Products Corporation. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division. h. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.

2. Low-Emitting Materials: Mastic shall have a VOC content of not more than 70 g/L. 3. Low-Emitting Materials: Mastic shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the

testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges of each mirror in a single piece. [ In Toilet Rooms]

1. Finish: [Clear] bright anodized.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Mirror Edge Treatment: [Flat polished] [Rounded polished] [Flat high-polished] [Rounded high-polished] [Beveled polished edge of width shown].

1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.

B. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.

B. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.











088300 - 3

1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at quarter points.

2. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.

C. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah GYPSUM BOARD

092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

2.2 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.

B. Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. [Regular type unless otherwise indicated] [Type X where indicated] [Type as required for specific fire-resistance-rated assemblies] [Sag-resistant type for ceiling surfaces].

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation.

C. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. [Regular type unless otherwise indicated] [Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated].













092900 - 2

a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple-Inland. h. USG Corporation.

D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness indicated. [Regular type unless otherwise indicated] [Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and where indicated].


a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. PABCO Gypsum. f. Temple-Inland. g. USG Corporation. h. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9, ASTM C 1288, or ASTM C 1325.


a. Custom Building Products; [Wonderboard] [EasyBoard]. b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; [Hardiebacker] [Hardiebacker 500]. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. d. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation.>

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. For exterior trim, use accessories formed from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

1. Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide LC-bead (J-bead) at exposed panel edges. 3. Provide control joints where indicated.

B. Aluminum Accessories: Extruded-aluminum accessories indicated with [baked-enamel finish, AA-C12C42R1x].

1. Manufacturers:

a. Fry Reglet Corp. [Shape – DCS-50-75 – Color to be selected]
























092900 - 3

b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries.

C. Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.

1. Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. 2. Joint Compounds: [Setting-type taping compound and drying-type, ready-mixed,

compounds for topping].[ Use setting-type compounds at exterior soffits.] 3. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 4 finish, use [setting-type, sandable topping

compound]. 4. Cementitious Backer Unit Joint-Treatment Materials: Products recommended by

cementitious backer unit manufacturer.

D. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2. Adhesive shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.

1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

F. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (unfaced).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.

1. Isolate gypsum board assemblies from abutting structural and masonry work. Provide edge trim and acoustical sealant.

2. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws. 3. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers [and face layer separately to

supports with screws].

B. Install cementitious backer units to comply with ANSI A108.11.

C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.

D. Finishing Gypsum Board: ASTM C 840.




092900 - 4

1. At concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide Level 1 finish: Embed tape at joints.

2. At substrates for tile, provide Level 2 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.

3. Unless otherwise indicated

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

, provide Level 4 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.

F. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TILING

093000 - 1

SECTION 093000 - TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples.

B. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run for each contiguous area

C. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.[ Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling ceramic tile packages.]

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CERAMIC TILE

A. Ceramic tile that complies with Standard grade requirements in ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile."

B. Tile Type[ CT-<#>]: [Unglazed] [Glazed], square-edged quarry tile.

C. Tile Type[ CT-<#>]: [Glazed] [Decorative thin or Porcelain] wall tile.


one of the following if approved by architect:

3. Module Size: As indicated on the drawings. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 5. Face: [Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges]. 6. Finish: As per finish schedule. 7. Color and Pattern: As shown on drawings. 8. Grout Color: [As selected] . 9. Retain "Mounting" Subparagraph below if pregrouted tile is required. 10. Mounting: Pregrouted sheets of tiles factory assembled and grouted with manufacturer's

standard white silicone rubber. 11. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable[ and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile]. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved. b. Base for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Straight. c. Wainscot Cap for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose cap. d. Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose.



093000 - 2

e. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with radius of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

f. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. g. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle

pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.2 NOT REQUIRED

2.3 STONE THRESHOLDS

A. Stone Threshold Type[ TH-<#>]: 1. Stone Type: Travertine, complying with ASTM C 1527, [Classification I, Exterior]

[Classification II, Interior]. 2. Color: [Beige].

3. Finish: [Honed]. 4. Fabricate thresholds to be not more than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) above adjoining finished

floor surfaces, with transition edges beveled on a slope of no greater than 1:2.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.

1. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

B. Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement [Underlayment]. b. James Hardie; [Hardiebacker].

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and fluid-applied waterproofing membranes shall have a VOC content of 65 g/L or less.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives and fluid-applied waterproofing membranes shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Waterproofing Membranes for Thin-Set Installations: ANSI A118.10, [fabric-reinforced liquid-latex or elastomeric polymer product].








093000 - 3

F. Setting and Grouting Materials: Comply with material standards in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to materials and methods indicated.

1. Thin-Set Mortar Type: [Latex-portland] cement.

a. Manufacturers: b. Basis-of-Design Product: [Product indicated on Drawings] <Insert

manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product of one of the following:

1) Boiardi Products; a QEP company. 2) Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. 3) Bostik, Inc. 4) C-Cure. 5) Custom Building Products. 6) Jamo Inc. 7) Laticrete International, Inc. 8) MAPEI Corporation. 9) Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. 10) Summitville Tiles, Inc. 11) TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2. Grout Type: Standard cement.

a. Manufacturers: b. Basis-of-Design Product: One of the following:

1) Laticrete International, Inc. 2) MAPEI Corporation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI's "Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.

a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. c. Tile swimming pool decks. d. Tile floors in laundries. e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

















093000 - 4

B. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

C. Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Align joints where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size.

D. Install [cementitious backer units] and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11.

E. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

F. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13.

G. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight.

H. Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).

I. Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Exterior Wall Tile Installation Method(s):

1. Exterior Walls over Wood Sheathing: [TCA W201 (cement mortar bed, on metal lath over waterproof membrane)].

K. Interior Floor Tile Installation Method(s):

1. Over Concrete Subfloors: [TCA F113 (thin-set mortar)] 2. Over Waterproof Membranes on Concrete Subfloors: [TCA F122 (thin-set mortar)].

L. Interior Wall Tile Installation Method(s): 1. Over Wood Studs or Furring: [TCA W243 (thin-set mortar on gypsum board)]

[TCA W244 (thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment)] [TCA W245 with thin-set mortar (thin-set mortar on glass-mat, water-resistant backer board)] [TCA W245 with organic adhesive (organic adhesive on glass-mat, water-resistant backer board)].

2. Bathtub Wall Installations, [Wood] Studs or Furring: [TCA B413 with thin-set mortar (thin-set mortar on water-resistant gypsum board)].

3. Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations, [Wood] Studs or Furring: [TCA B412 (thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber cement underlayment)].


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1

SECTION 095100 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical ceiling work shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01300. B. Show layout of all systems including attachments, intersections of members, and edge conditions.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with other trades whose work is affected by the work of this section. Before proceeding, verify that all inspections and tests have been made.

B. Standards 1. Comply with all applicable requirements of Acoustical Materials Association Bulletin

"Architectural Acoustical Materials".

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver all manufactured materials in original containers bearing manufacturer's name and brand. Use only 1 brand for each type or unit. Store materials in locations directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Approved Manufacturers 1. Armstrong 2. Celotex 3. U.S. Gypsum 4. Certainteed

2.02 LAY-IN TILE

A. All 2’ x 2’ ceilings. 1. 24" x 24" x 5/8" Armstrong lay-in tile White Tundra,.

B Direct hung "Suprafine" 9/16" low sheen satin white enamel. Grid system to match corresponding tile

2.03 EXTRA STOCK

A. Order 2% additional material for maintenance use at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.04 EXPOSED CEILING GRID

A. The exposed suspension system shall standard grid compatible with acoustical tile, manufactured by acoustical tile manufacturer.

B. Main runners, ASTM C-635, cold rolled electrogalvanized steel with factory applied white paint finish.

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2

C. Angle: Cold rolled electrogalvanized steel with factory applied white paint finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine subsurfaces to receive work and report, in writing to the Architect any detrimental conditions. Failure to observe this injunction constitutes a waiver to any subsequent claims to the contrary. Commencement of work will be construed as acceptance of all subsurfaces.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and comply with the

requirements of Article 2, "Installation of Components", of ASTM C-636. B. Suspend hangers from structural supporting member or intermediate framing members only. Secure

to structural and intermediate framing members by attaching to metal clips designed for the type of member involved, looping and wire-tying directly to members.

C. Space hangers to fall not more than 6" from ends and not more than 4 ft. o.c., between ends of primary suspension member, and as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling. Do not attach hangers to ducts, pipes or other similar work which occurs above ceiling; provide additional suspended ceiling members at such locations.

D. Space hangers and primary and secondary supporting members as required to prevent loads from fixtures and other items in or on the ceiling from causing eccentric deflection and rotation exceeding specified limits. Loading of any component shall not cause deflection of more than 1/360 of the span.

E. All hanger wire ties shall have three complete tight twists within 2-1/2" of top of ceiling grid. Hanger wire shall and lateral bracing wire shall be minimum 12 gage annealed wire.

F. Main runners shall be installed 48" o.c., interconnected by locking cross tees 24" long to form 24" x 48" modules. Proper length locking cross tees shall also be installed adjacent to all sides of recessed light fixtures not supported by main runners.

G. 7/8” Wall angle moldings shall be installed wherever suspension components meet vertical surfaces. H. Pay particular attention to the number and placement of hanger wires around light fixtures.

3.02 ACOUSTICAL TILE INSTALLATION

A. Install units to framing grid from set-out points and the pattern shown on the drawings. Install units in place, fitting snugly.

B. Coordinate location of electrical and mechanical fixtures. Make adjustments as required to accommodate other trades.

3.03 SEISMIC BRACING

A. Provide seismic bracing required by seismic zone three for suspended lay-in systems per International Building Code 2012, refer to the details on the drawings.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. Refer to Section 01700. END OF SECTION

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah RESILIENT FLOORING

096500 - 1

SECTION 096500 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Extra Materials:

1. Resilient Wall Base: Deliver to Owner at least 5% of the linear feet of each type and color of resilient wall base installed.

2. Resilient Floor Tile: Deliver to Owner one box for every [50] boxes or fraction thereof, of each type and color of resilient floor tile installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Manufacturers:

B. 1. Johnsonite. 2. Roppe Corporation, USA.

C. Color and Pattern: 4” Roppe Coved Base – P#140 Fawn.

D. ASTM F 1861, [Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset)].

E. Group (Manufacturing Method): [I (solid)].

F. Style: [Cove (base with toe)].

G. Minimum Thickness: [0.125 inch (3.2 mm)].

H. Height: [4 inches (102 mm)].

I. Lengths: [coils in manufacturer's standard lengths].

J. Outside Corners: [preformed].

K. Inside Corners: [Job formed].

L. Finish: [Low luster].





096500 - 2

2.2 NOT REQUIRED

2.3 NOT REQUIRED

2.4 NOT REQUIRED

2.5 NOT REQUIRED

2.6 SOLID RESILIENT PLANK FLOORING

A. Products: PARTERRE FLOORING SYSTEMS 1. Parterre #11403 Lancaster Natural 4” & 6” Random Plank.

B. Color and Pattern: <Insert color and pattern>.

C. ASTM F 1700; [Class I, Monolithic Vinyl Plank].

D. Fire-Test Response: Critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.

E. Thickness: [0.120 inch (3.0 mm)].

F. Size: 6” & 4” x36” Planks

G. Install as per Parterre Flooring Systems Manufacturing Specification.

2.7 NOT REQUIRED

2.8 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Products:[ One of the following:]

1. AB ColorPlus, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.;. 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;. 3. Congoleum Corporation;. 4. Mannington Mills, Inc.; # Mannington Commercial Essentials. 5. Tarkett, Inc.; <Insert product name or designation>. 6. Vinylasa Tile, Distributed by American Tile Inc.;

B. Color and Pattern: #137 Sandrift & #112 Pewter, Lay in 2’ Bands as shown on Finish Floor Plan.

C. ASTM F 1066, [Class 1 (solid-color tile)] [Class 2 (through-pattern tile)] [Class 3 (surface-pattern tile)].










096500 - 3

D. Fire-Test Response: Critical radiant flux classification of Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.

E. Wearing Surface: [Smooth].

F. Thickness: [0.125 inch (3.2 mm)].

G. Size: 12 by 12 inches (304.8 by 304.8 mm).

2.9 NOT REQUIRED

2.10 NOT REQUIRED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 NOT REQUIRED


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah CARPETING

096800 - 1

SECTION 096800 - CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner [full-width carpet] [and] [carpet tiles] equal to 5 percent of each type and color installed, packaged with protective covering for storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT REQUIRED

2.2 NOT REQUIRED

2.3 CARPET TILE [Refer to Drawings]

A. Manufacturers: [LEES – Play of Light Collection]

B. Basis-of-Design Product: – [LEES – Play of Light Collection, Radiating Out #GT146, Monolithic, Color #831 Sundance] or a comparable product of one of the following:

1. [LEES – Play of Light Collection, Radiating Out #GT146, Monolithic, Color #831 Sundance].

C. Fiber Content: [100 percent nylon 6, 6] [100 percent nylon 6] [100 percent polypropylene] [100 percent wool] [80 percent wool; 20 percent nylon 6, 6] [80 percent wool; 20 percent nylon 6] <Insert content by percentage>.

D. Face Construction: [Tufted-Multi-colored Loop.

E. Guage: 1/12 (47.00 Rows per 10 CM].

F. Surface Pile Weight: <26 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m) excluding weight of backings>.

G. Size: [24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm)].

2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Carpet Adhesives: Product that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended by [LEES] for conditions indicated.

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah CARPETING

096800 - 2

1. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with Green Seal's GS-36 and with the

testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Carpet Tile Adhesives: Pressure-sensitive type that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for conditions indicated for releasable installation.

1. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRI 104.

B. Carpet Installation Method: [Direct glue-down]

1. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under

door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

C. Carpet Tile Installation Method: [Glue down; releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive].


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah PAINTING AND COATING

099000 - 1

SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data.[ Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product highlighted.]

2. Samples.

B. Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied where directed.

C. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner [1 gal. (3.8 L)] [1 quart (0.9 L)] <Insert quantity> of each color and type of finish coat paint used on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT

A. Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Columbia Paint & Coatings. 3. ICI Paints. 4. Kwal Paint. 5. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 6. Pratt & Lambert. 7. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." [Not all of these products apply to this project, this is an all inclusive list of standards]

1. Exterior Painting Materials:

a. Block Filler, Latex: MPI #4. b. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3. c. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. d. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69. e. Primer, Alkyd, Anticorrosive: MPI #79. f. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. g. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95. h. Primer, Latex: MPI #6. i. Primer, Alkyd: MPI #5. j. Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.










099000 - 2

k. Latex, Exterior Low Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4): MPI #15. l. Latex, Exterior Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #11. m. Latex, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #119. n. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based (Gloss Level 3): MPI #161. o. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5):

MPI #163. p. Light Industrial Coating, Exterior, Water Based, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):

MPI #164. q. Alkyd, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #8. r. Alkyd, Exterior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94. s. Alkyd, Exterior Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #9. t. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81. u. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96. v. Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): MPI #60. w. Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #27.

2. Interior Painting Materials:

a. Block Filler, Latex: MPI #4. b. Primer Sealer, Latex: MPI #50. c. Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3. d. Primer Sealer, Institutional Low Odor/VOC: MPI #149. e. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39. f. Primer Sealer, Alkyd, Interior: MPI #45. g. Primer, Bonding, Water Based: MPI #17. h. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based: MPI #69. i. Primer, Alkyd, Anticorrosive: MPI #79. j. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134. k. Primer, Quick Dry, for Aluminum: MPI #95. l. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1): MPI #53. m. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #44. n. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 4): MPI #43. o. Latex, Interior, Semigloss, (Gloss Level 5): MPI #54. p. Latex, Interior, Gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except Minimum Gloss of 65 Units at 60

Degrees): MPI #114. q. Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #143. r. Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #144. s. Latex, Institutional Low Odor/VOC, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #147. t. Latex, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 2): MPI #138. u. Latex, High Performance Architectural, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #141. v. Alkyd, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #49. w. Alkyd, Interior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #47. x. Alkyd, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #48. y. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #81. z. Alkyd, Quick Dry, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #96. aa. Floor Paint, Latex, Low Gloss (Maximum Gloss Level 3): MPI #60. bb. Floor Enamel, Alkyd, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #27.

3. Staining and Clear Finishing Materials:

a. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.


099000 - 3

b. Primer, Latex for Exterior Wood: MPI #6. c. Primer, Alkyd for Exterior Wood: MPI #5. d. Primer, Oil for Exterior Wood: MPI #7. e. Preservative, for Exterior Wood: MPI #37. f. Alkyd, Sanding Sealer, Clear: MPI #102. g. Shellac: MPI #88. h. Stain, Exterior, Water Based, Solid Hide: MPI #16. i. Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Solid Hide: MPI #14. j. Stain, Exterior, Solvent Based, Semitransparent: MPI #13. k. Stain, for Exterior Wood Decks: MPI #33. l. Stain, Semitransparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90. m. Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #128. n. Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #129. o. Varnish, Water Based, Clear, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #130. p. Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #30. q. Varnish, with UV Inhibitor, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #29. r. Varnish, Marine Spar, Exterior, Gloss (Gloss Level 7): MPI #28. s. Varnish, Interior, Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #73. t. Varnish, Interior, Semigloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #74. u. Varnish, Interior, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #75. v. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57. w. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #56. x. Varnish, Polyurethane, Moisture-Cured, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #31. y. Varnish, Aliphatic Polyurethane, Two-Component (Gloss Level 6 or 7): MPI #78. z. Danish Oil: MPI #92.

4. High-Performance Coating Materials:

a. Block Filler, Latex: MPI #4. b. Block Filler, Epoxy: MPI #116. c. Primer Sealer, Latex: MPI #50. d. Primer, Zinc-Rich, Epoxy: MPI #20. e. Primer, Epoxy, Anticorrosive: MPI #101. f. Epoxy, Gloss: MPI #77. g. Epoxy-Modified Latex, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #115. h. Epoxy Deck Coating (Slip Resistant): MPI #82. i. Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #72.

C. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates.

1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

D. Use[ interior] paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: [50] g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings: [150] g/L. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: [400] g/L. 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: [200] g/L. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: [250] g/L.


099000 - 4

6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: [340] g/L. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: [420] g/L. 8. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: [350] g/L. 9. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: [550] g/L. 10. Floor Coatings: [100] g/L. 11. Shellacs, Clear: [730] g/L. 12. Shellacs, Pigmented: [550] g/L. 13. Stains: [250] g/L.

E. Colors: As [selected by architect and approved by owner].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Paint exposed new surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 2. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint the back side of access panels. 4. Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces. 5. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not practical.

2. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.


099000 - 5

1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

E. Apply stains and transparent finishes to produce surface films without color irregularity, cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other imperfections. Use multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster.

3.3 NOT REQUIRED

3.4 NOT REQUIRED

3.5 NOT USED

3.6 INTERIOR STAIN AND CLEAR FINISH APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including [wood trim].

B. 1. [Satin] Water-Based Varnish over Stain: [Three coats] over stain: MPI INT 6.1R.

3.7 NOT REQUIRED

3.8 NOT REQUIRED


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TOILET COMPARTMENTS

102113 - 1

SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOILET COMPARTMENTS AND SCREENS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. All American Metal Corp. 3. American Sanitary Partition Corporation. 4. Ampco, Inc. 5. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 7. Comtec Industries/Capitol Partitions. 8. Flush Metal Partition Corp. 9. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 10. Global Steel Products Corp. 11. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc. 12. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. 13. Marlite. 14. Metpar Corp. 15. Partitions Systems Incorporated of South Carolina. 16. Rockville Partitions Incorporated. 17. Santana Products, Inc. 18. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company. 19. Shanahan's Limited. 20. Tex-Lam Manufacturing, Inc. 21. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. 22. Young Group, Ltd. (The); Fabricated Products Division; DesignRite Partitions. 23. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Accessibility Guidelines] [and] [ICC A117.1] for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheets for Color-Coated Finish: Mill-phosphatized, corrosion-resistant steel sheet.

























102113 - 2

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G). 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, [No. 3 or No. 4 directional polish] [textured finish].

C. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.

1. Color: [As selected] <Insert color(s)>.

D. Solid-Plastic, Phenolic Core: Solid phenolic core with melamine facing fused to both sides, without visible glue line or seam, with eased edges and with minimum 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick panels and screens.

1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] [75] [200] or less per ASTM E 84. 2. Color: [As selected] <Insert color(s)>.

E. Solid-Polymer: High-density polyethylene with homogenous color, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with seamless construction and eased edges.

1. Flame-Spread Index: [25] [75] [200] or less per ASTM E 84. 2. Color: [As selected] <Insert color(s)>.

F. Core Material for Metal-Faced Units: Sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.

G. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard, in thicknesses required to provide nominal thicknesses of 1 inch (25 mm) minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.

H. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): [Stainless steel] [Stainless steel or solid plastic, polymer resin] [Solid plastic, polymer resin], not less than 3 inches (75 mm) high.

I. Brackets: [Stirrup] [Continuous].

1. Material: [Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast-zinc alloy (zamac)] [Stainless steel] [Chrome-plated brass] [Clear-anodized aluminum] [Solid plastic] [Manufacturer's standard].

2.3 FABRICATION

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb, with not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Provide brackets, pilaster shoes, bracing, and other components required for a complete installation.


102113 - 3

Use theft-resistant exposed fasteners finished to match hardware. Use sleeve nuts for through-bolt applications.

1. Stirrup Brackets: Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.[ Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.]

2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES [REFER TO DRAWINGS]

A. Manufacturers:


1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), or ASTM B 30.

C. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6 or 6463-T6.

D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness.

E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180).

F. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

G. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating.

H. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered).

I. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.








APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

102800 - 2

J. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

K. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

L. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of [six] <Insert number> keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.

B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TUB AND SHOWER DOORS

102819 - 1

SECTION 102819 - TUB AND SHOWER DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Submittals: Product Data[ and Shop Drawings].

B. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on Shop Drawings.

C. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship for the period of [two] [three] <Insert number> years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS

A. Manufacturers:

B. Basis-of-Design Product

1.

: [Product indicated on Drawings] <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation> or a comparable product of one of the following:

Alumax. 2. Agalite. 3. American Shower Door. 4. Artistcraft. 5. Basco. 6. Cardinal Shower Enclosures. 7. Century Bathworks. 8. Coral Industries, Inc. 9. Fleurco Shower Doors. 10. Masco Bath Corporation. 11. Southeastern Aluminum Products, Inc. 12. Vitro America.

C. Framed Units: Provide metal-framed doors and panels.

D. Semi-Frameless Units: Provide metal-framed units, with hardware-supported glass doors that do not have metal framing.

E. Hardware-Supported Units: Provide units fully supported with hardware and that do not have metal framing.

F. Door Operation: [Swinging on continuous hinges].















102819 - 2

1. Safety Clip System: Manufacturer's accessory designed to prevent door from falling off of sliding track.

G. Operating Hardware: <Insert manufacturer's hardware style>.

H. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, stainless steel or other non-corrosive fasteners.

I. Accessibility Requirements: For shower enclosures designated as accessible, comply with U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's Accessibility Guidelines, ICC A117.1, and HUD's "Fair Housing Accessibility Guidelines."

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Glass Doors[ and Panels]: Safety glazing materials complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II, with permanently etched identification acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), Kind FT.

1. [Acid etched] [Sandblasted].

C. Ultraclear Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), Kind FT; with visible light transmission not less than 91 percent.

D. Tinted Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class II, Kind FT.

1. Tint: [Bronze] [Green] [As selected] <Insert description>.

E. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II, Class 1 (clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6, [Finish F1 (patterned one side)] [Finish F2 (patterned both sides)].

1. Pattern: [As selected] <Insert description>.

F. Glass Nominal Thickness: [5 mm] [6 mm] [10 mm] [12 mm] <Insert thickness>.

G. Framing: [Aluminum] [Brass].

H. Hardware: [Aluminum] [Brass].

I. Aluminum Finish: [Polished, clear anodized] [Polished, gold anodized] [Bronze anodized] [Black anodized] <Insert finish>.

J. Brass Finish: [Bright chrome plated] [Bright brass sputter-coated] <Insert finish>.

K. Installation Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Low-Emitting Materials: VOC content of sealants not more than 250 g/L. 2. Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants complying with testing and product requirements of

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


102819 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Prepare and install as recommended in manufacturer's written instructions, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual."

B. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels and anchor securely in place.

C. Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

104400 - 1

SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS

A. Fire-Protection Cabinets <Insert type designation used on Drawings if using more than one type>: Enameled-steel, [recessed] [semirecessed] [surface-mounted] cabinets for [fire extinguisher] [extinguisher and hose valve] [hose, rack, valve, and extinguisher] [hose, rack, and valve] [hose valve].



a. Fire End & Croker Corporation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc. f. Moon-American. g. Potter Roemer LLC. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc. i. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

B. Fire-Resistance Rating: [None] [1-hour] [2-hour] [Same as walls where they are installed].

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating indicated. Constructed with double walls fabricated from 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) thick, steel sheet lined with fire-barrier material.

C. Cabinet Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [Stainless-steel] sheet.

1. Trim Style: [Trimless] [Flat trim] [Square trim] [Rolled trim]. 2. Trim Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [Stainless steel].

D. Door Material: [Steel] [Aluminum] [Stainless steel].

1. Door Style: [Fully glazed with frame] [Full bubble with frame] [Vertical duo] [Center panel] [Solid opaque with frame] [Flush opaque frameless].

2. Door Glazing: [Tempered float glass] [Break glass] [Acrylic] [Acrylic bubble].











104400 - 2

E. Accessories: [Mounting brackets] [Break glass strike] [Identification lettering] [Alarm].

F. Finishes:

1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:

a. Exterior of cabinet [door] [trim] [, door, and trim] except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.

b. Interior of cabinet[ and door].

2. Aluminum: [Clear anodic] [Color anodic] [Baked enamel or powder coat]. 3. Steel: [Factory primed for field painting] [Baked enamel or powder coat]. 4. Stainless Steel: [No. 2B] [No. 4] [No. 6] [No. 7] [No. 8].

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS[ AND BRACKETS]

A. Portable Fire Extinguishers <Insert type designation used on Drawings if using more than one type>: NFPA 10, listed and labeled for the type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.



a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. i. Moon-American. j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. k. Potter Roemer LLC. l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. m. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Stored-Pressure Water Type: UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. (9.5-L) nominal capacity, in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.

4. Stored-Pressure Antifreeze Type: UL-rated 2-A, 2.5-gal. (9.5-L) nominal capacity, in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.

5. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated [1-A:10-B:C, 2.5-lb (1.1-kg)] [2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg)] [3-A:40-B:C, 6-lb (2.7-kg)] [4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb (4.5-kg)] nominal capacity, in [enameled-steel] [enameled-aluminum] [chrome-plated brass] container.

B. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.















104400 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinets at [54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet] [heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

B. Fire-Rated Hose or Valve Cabinets: Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant.

C. Identification: Apply [decals] [vinyl lettering] to cabinets at locations indicated.

D. Install mounting brackets in locations indicated at [54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher] [heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction].

E. Install fire extinguishers in [mounting brackets] [and] [cabinets] where indicated.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah SITE FURNISHINGS

129300 - 1

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SITE FURNISHINGS

A. Bicycle Racks:

B. Trash Receptacles:

1. Manufacturers: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: or a comparable product of one of the following:

a. A & T Iron Works, Inc. b. BCI Burke Company, LLC. c. BRP Enterprises, Inc. d. Canterbury International. e. Columbia Cascade Company. f. Country Casual. g. Creative Pipe, Inc. h. DuMor Inc. i. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc. j. Fiberglass Engineering Company. k. Fibrex Group Inc. (The). l. Forms+Surfaces. m. GameTime; a PlayCore, Inc. company. n. Gardenside, Ltd. o. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd. p. Huntco Supply, LLC. q. Kay Park Recreation. r. Keystone Ridge Designs, Inc. s. Landscape Forms. t. Landscape Structures Inc. u. L. A. Steelcraft. v. Maglin Site Furniture Inc. w. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc. x. Playworld Systems, Inc. y. Recreation Creations, Inc. z. RPI. aa. Sitecraft.






























129300 - 2

bb. Smith & Hawken, Ltd. cc. Thomas Steele; Division of Trilary, Inc. dd. Urban Accessories, Inc. ee. Victor Stanley, Inc. ff. Wausau Tile, Inc. gg. Weatherend Estate Furniture. hh. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

3. Aluminum Facing Surrounds: [Aluminum sheet] [Perforated aluminum sheet] [Grid in tubular frame] [Evenly patterned, parallel aluminum straps, bars, or tubular shapes] [Match benches] <Insert material and description>.

4. [Steel] [Stainless-Steel] Facing Surrounds: [Metal sheet] [Perforated sheet] [Evenly patterned, parallel straps, bars, or tubular shapes] [Grid in tubular frame] [Match benches] <Insert material and description>.

5. Wood Facing Surrounds: [Evenly spaced, Douglas fir slats] [Evenly spaced pine slats] [Evenly spaced cedar slats] [Evenly spaced redwood slats] [Evenly spaced teak slats] [Match benches] <Insert wood type and description>.

6. Fiberglass Facing Surrounds: Molded fiberglass shape. 7. Plastic Facing Surrounds: [Molded HDPE shape] [Evenly spaced HDPE slats]

[Evenly spaced, recycled HDPE slats] [Match benches] <Insert plastic type and description>.

8. Shape: [Round cylinder] [Round cylinder with funnel top] [Round, tapered column] [Square column] [Rectangular column] [As indicated] <Insert shape and form>; with opening for depositing trash in [lid or top] [side of lid or top] [receptacle side].

9. Inner Container: [Aluminum] [Galvanized-steel sheet] [Perforated-metal] [Fiberglass] [Rigid plastic] container with [drain holes] [lift-out handles]; designed to be removable and reusable.

10. Capacity: Not less than [22 gal. (83 L)] [28 gal. (106 L)] [30 gal. (114 L)] [32 gal. (121 L)] [40 gal. (151 L)] [55 gal. (208 L)] <Insert capacity>.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Aluminum Finish: [Mill] [baked enamel] [or] [powder coat].

B. Steel and Iron:

1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M[, hot-dip galvanized]. 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A 135M[, hot-dip galvanized]. 3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M[, hot-dip galvanized]. 4. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 5. Iron Castings: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, or gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M. 6. Steel Finish: [Baked enamel] [or] [powder coat].

C. Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of knots, solid stock of species indicated.

1. Wood Species: [Manufacturer's standard] <Insert species>.








129300 - 3

D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Pressure-treat wood according to AWPA U1 with chemicals containing no arsenic or chromium. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

E. Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable, colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.

F. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.

G. Grout: Factory-packaged grout complying with ASTM C 1107; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Anchor site furnishings securely, positioned at locations and elevations indicated.

B. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing.

C. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete and fill annular space between post and concrete with grout.

D. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted, fill annular space between post and sleeve with grout.


Table of Contents Generated by Masterworks: 10/15/2013

Division Section Title Pages

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 22 � PLUMBING

220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 5

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 2

220523 GENERAL/DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2

220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 4

221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 4

221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 6

221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 3

221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 2

223400 FUEL/FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 2

224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 5

226313 GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 11

DIVISION 23 � HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 4

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2

230700 HVAC INSULATION 3

231123 FACILITY NATURAL/GAS PIPING 4

233100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 3

233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 2

235100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 2

237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL/STATION AIR/HANDLING UNITS 8

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

APEX Dental Practices Facility � Sandy, Utah 10/15/2013

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 � 1

SECTION 220500 � COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping Equipment:

1. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

a. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, and system contents.

b. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

c. Design seismic�restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain

approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized�Steel�Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc

coated, with plain ends.

B. PVC�Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

C. Galvanized�Steel�Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239�inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

2.3 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post�hardening and volume�adjusting, dry,

hydraulic�cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000�psi, 28�day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.



2.4 ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES

A. One�Piece, Deep�Pattern Type: Deep�drawn, box�shaped brass with chrome�plated finish and

spring�clip fasteners.

B. One�Piece, Stamped�Steel Type: With chrome�plated finish and spring�clip fasteners.

C. One�Piece Floor Plates: Cast�iron flange.

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES AND TEST PLUGS

A. Direct�Mounted, Metal�Case, Dial�Type Pressure Gages:

1. Standard: ASME B40.100.

2. Case: Sealed Solid�front, pressure relief type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel 4�1/2�inch

nominal diameter.

3. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

4. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

5. Pointer: Dark�colored metal.

6. Window: Glass.

7. Ring: Metal.

8. Accuracy: Grade C, plus or minus 3 percent of middle half of scale range.

B. Test Plug: Corrosion�resistant brass or stainless�steel body with two self�sealing rubber core

inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated

piping. Minimum pressure and temperature rating 500 psig at 200 deg F.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING EQUPMENT

A. Carbon�Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP�58, Types 1 through 58, factory�fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous�thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP�58, Types 1 through 58, copper�coated�steel, factory�fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous�thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper�coated steel.

C. Fastener Systems:

1. Powder�Actuated Fasteners: Threaded�steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull�out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.



2. Mechanical�Expansion Anchors: Insert�wedge�type, zinc�coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull�out, tension, and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

D. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon�steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

2. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory�mixed and �packaged, dry, hydraulic�cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

a. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

b. Design Mix: 5000�psi, 28�day compressive strength.

PART 3 � EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install piping free of sags and bends.

B. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

C. Sleeves:

1. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and

walls.

2. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and

walls are constructed.

a. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve�seal

system.

3. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

4. Fire�Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with

requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078446 "Penetration Firestopping."

D. Escutcheons and Floor Plates:

1. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

2. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and

with OD that completely covers opening.

3. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment�room floors.

4. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and


E. Meters and Gages:

1. Install direct�mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at

the most readable position.



2. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and

maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

F. Install unions at final connection to each piece of equipment.

G. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas

piping.

H. Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in

water piping.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with MSS SP�69 and MSS SP�89. Install building attachments within concrete or to

structural steel.

B. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems.

C. Install powder�actuated fasteners and mechanical�expansion anchors in concrete after concrete

is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick.

D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

E. Horizontal�Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

F. Vertical�Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

2. Carbon� or Alloy�Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

3.3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 � 1

SECTION 220513 � COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible

with the following:

a. Motor controllers.

b. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

c. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

d. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in

plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

above sea level.

C. Polyphase Motors:

1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

a. Service Factor: 1.15.

2. Rotor: Random�wound, squirrel cage.

3. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading.

4. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

5. Insulation: Class F.

6. Code Letter Designation:

a. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

7. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for

motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

D. Polyphase Motors with Additional Requirements:


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 � 2

1. Motors Used with Reduced�Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring

connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in

motor terminal box, suited to control method.

2. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

E. Single Phase Motors:

1. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

a. Permanent�split capacitor.

b. Split phase.

c. Capacitor start, inductor run.

d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

2. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial

and thrust loading.

3. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded�pole type.

4. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of

motor insulation. Thermal�protection device shall automatically reset when motor

temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 � EXECUTION (Not Used)



GENERAL�DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 � 1

SECTION 220523 � GENERAL�DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and

design criteria.

B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable�water service.

2.2 GENERAL�DUTY VALVES

A. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2�inch stem extensions.

C. End Connections: Threads shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1. Flanges shall comply with

ANSI B16.1 for cast�iron valves and with ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves. Solder�joint

connections shall comply with ANSI B16.18.

D. Two�Piece, Copper�Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full�port, chrome�plated

bronze ball; PTFE or TFE seats; and 600�psig minimum CWP rating and blowout�proof stem.

E. Bronze, Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze body with bronze disc and seat.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use ball valves for shutoff duty; ball for throttling duty.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves for each fixture and item of equipment.


GENERAL�DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 � 2

D. Install three�valve bypass around each pressure�reducing valve using throttling�type valves.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.



PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 � 1

SECTION 220700 � PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


2. For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content

and chemical components.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame�spread index of 25 or less, and smoke�developed index of

50 or less according to ASTM E 84.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

B. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed�cell, sponge� or expanded�rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

C. Mineral�Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with

factory�applied ASJ.

D. Mineral�Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA

Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB; and having factory�applied

ASJ. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k�value) at 100 deg F is

0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL�A�24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

B. Mineral�Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL�A�3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL�A�3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.


2.4 MASTICS

A. Vapor�Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

2. Water�Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43�mil dry

film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: White or gray.

5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

2. Fire� and water�resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


4. Color: White.

5. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less.

2.6 FACTORY�APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory�applied jackets on various applications. When

factory�applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ�SSL: ASJ with self�sealing, pressure�sensitive, acrylic�based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.7 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor�retarder tape matching factory�applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.



2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.


3.1 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association's "National

Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards" for insulation installation on pipes and

equipment.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire�Rated Wall, Partition, and Floor Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations. Seal penetrations. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation:

1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation

that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install mitered sections of pipe

insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

E. Mineral�Fiber Insulation Installation:

1. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Where vapor barriers are indicated,

seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor�barrier mastic and joint

sealant.

2. For insulation with factory�applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

3. For insulation with factory�applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer and seal with vapor�barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

F. Interior Piping System Applications: Insulate the following piping systems:

1. Domestic hot water.

2. Roof drain bodies and horizontal rainwater leaders of storm water piping.

3. Exposed water supplies and sanitary drains of fixtures for people with disabilities.

G. Do not apply insulation to the following systems, materials, and equipment:

1. Flexible connectors.



2. Sanitary drainage and vent piping.

3. Chrome�plated pipes and fittings, except for plumbing fixtures for people with

disabilities.

4. Piping specialties, including air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves,

and flow regulators.

3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawlspaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome�plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1�1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

b. Mineral�Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1�1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:



C. Roof Drain and Overflow Drain Bodies:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:





DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 � 1

SECTION 221116 � DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.

2. Product for solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 PREFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable�water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping

components shall be marked with "NSF�pw."

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper with wrought�

copper, solder�joint fittings. Furnish wrought�copper fittings if indicated.

1. Copper Unions: Cast�copper�alloy, hexagonal�stock body, with ball�and�socket, metal�

to�metal seating surfaces and solder�joint or threaded ends.

2. Joining Materials: Use ASTM B 813, water�flushable, lead�free flux; ASTM B 32, lead�

free�alloy solder.

B. Soft Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper with copper

pressure fittings, cast�copper�alloy or wrought�copper, solder�joint fittings. Furnish wrought�

copper fittings if indicated.

1. Joining Materials: Use ASTM B 813, water�flushable, lead�free flux; ASTM B 32, lead�

free�alloy solder.

C. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 40 pipe with ASTM F 438, CPVC Schedule 40

socket�type fittings.

D. PEX Tube and Fittings: ASTM F 877, SDR 9 PEX tubing and ASTM F 1807, metal insert�type

fittings with copper or stainless�steel crimp rings.

1. Manifold: ASTM F 877 plastic or corrosion�resistant�metal assembly, with a plastic or

corrosion�resistant�metal valve for each outlet.

E. Special�Duty Valves:



1. Comply with requirements in Section 220523 "General�Duty Valves for Plumbing

Piping" for general�duty metal valves.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for

balancing valves, drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

3. CPVC Union Ball Valves: MSS SP�122, with full�port ball, socket detachable end

connectors, and pressure rating not less than 125 psig at 73 deg F.

4. CPVC Check Valves: Swing or ball�check design and pressure rating not less than 150

psig at 73 deg F.

F. Transition Fittings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. Same size

as pipes to be joined and pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

G. Flexible Connectors: Stainless�steel, corrugated�metal tubing with wire�braid covering.

Working�pressure rating a minimum of 200 psig.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic

piping installation requirements.

B. Install wall penetration system at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make

installation watertight. Comply with requirements in Section 220500 "Common Work Results

for Plumbing" for wall penetration systems.

C. Install shutoff valve, hose�end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,

inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in

Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for pressure gages and Section 221119

"Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

D. Install domestic water piping without pitch for horizontal piping and plumb for vertical piping.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic

piping joint construction.

1. Soldered Joints: Comply with procedures in ASTM B 828 unless otherwise indicated.

F. Comply with requirements in Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for pipe

hanger and support devices.

1. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:

a. NPS 1�1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

b. NPS 1�1/2: 108 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

c. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8�inch rod.

d. NPS 2�1/2: 11 feet with 1/2�inch rod.

e. Support vertical piping at each floor.



2. Install vinyl�coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal

spacing and minimum rod diameters:

a. NPS 1 and Smaller: 36 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

b. NPS 1�1/4 to NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

c. NPS 2�1/2 to NPS 3�1/2: 48 inches with 1/2�inch rod.

d. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller,

and every 72 inches for NPS 1�1/4 and larger.

3. Install vinyl�coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal

spacing and minimum rod diameters:

a. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

b. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.

3.2 INSPECTING AND CLEANING

A. Inspect and test piping systems as follows:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound

and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired.

B. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping by filling system with water/chlorine solution

with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. Flush

system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the

standing time.

3.3 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Soft copper tubing.

B. Aboveground Distribution Piping: Type L hard copper tubing CPVC piping PEX piping.

3.4 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast�iron

butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2�1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use cast�iron

butterfly valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2�1/2 and larger.

3. Hot�Water�Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory�stop balancing valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose�end drain valves.

B. Install gate valves close to main on each branch and riser serving two or more plumbing fixtures

or equipment connections and where indicated.



C. Install gate or ball valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item, on each supply to each

plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies, and elsewhere as indicated.

D. CPVC ball, butterfly, and check valves may be used in matching piping materials.

E. Install drain valve at base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and where required to

drain water distribution piping system.

F. Install swing check valve on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install ball valves in each hot�water circulating loop and discharge side of each pump.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 � 1

SECTION 221119 � DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data: For each type of product.

2. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable�water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Pipe�Applied, Atmospheric�Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Standard: ASSE 1001.

2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

3. Body: Bronze.

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

5. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose�Connection Vacuum Breakers:


2. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

3. Outlet Connection: Garden�hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

4. Finish: Rough bronze.

C. Reduced�Pressure�Principle Backflow Preventers:


2. Operation: Continuous�pressure applications.

3. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

4. Accessories:



a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2�1/2 and Larger: Outside�screw and yoke�gate type with flanged

ends on inlet and outlet.

c. Air�Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow�preventer connection.

D. Water Regulators:


2. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2�1/2 and NPS 3.

E. Memory�Stop Balancing Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP�110 for two�piece, copper�alloy ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400�psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Port: Standard or full port.

6. Ball: Chrome�plated brass.

7. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

8. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.

9. Handle: Vinyl�covered steel with memory�setting device.

F. Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:


2. Pressure Rating: 125 psigminimum unless otherwise indicated.

3. Type: Exposed�mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion�resistant interior components.

5. Connections: Threaded union inlets and outlet.

6. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot� and cold�water supplies,

and adjustable, temperature�control handle.

7. Tempered�Water Setting: 120 deg F

8. Pressure Drop at Design Flow Rate: 5 psig.

9. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

10. Piping Finish: Copper.

G. Y�Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron for NPS 2�1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2�1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.

b. Strainers NPS 2�1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.

6. Drain: Factory�installed, hose�end drain valve.

H. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes:



1. Mounting: Recessed.

2. Material and Finish: Enameled�steel, or epoxy�painted�steel, and faceplate.

3. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot� and cold�water valved fittings

complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden�hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.

4. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing.

5. Drain: NPS 1�1/2 standpipe and P�trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.

6. Inlet Hoses: Two 60�inch� long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with

female, garden�hose�thread couplings. Include rubber washers.

7. Drain Hose: One 48�inch� long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked

end.

I. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:

1. Mounting: Recessed.

2. Material and Finish: Enameled�steel or epoxy�painted�steel box and faceplate.

3. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller

copper tube outlet.

4. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water

tubing.

J. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.

3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder�joint inlet.

5. Outlet Connection: Garden�hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose�connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011.

8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.

10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

12. Operation for Service Areas: Operating key.

13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

14. Include operating key with each operating�key hose bibb.

15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome� or nickel�plated hose bibb.

K. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed�outlet, self�draining wall hydrants.

2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

3. Operation: Loose key.

4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4.

6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden�hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.



8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden�hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

10. Nozzle and Wall�Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

11. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

L. Ball�Valve�Type, Hose�End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP�110 for standard�port, two�piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400�psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome�plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl�covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden�hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

M. Stop�and�Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP�110 for ball valves or MSS SP�80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 200�psig minimum CWP or Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.

5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.

N. Water�Hammer Arresters:

1. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI�WH 201.

2. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston.

3. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI�WH 201, Sizes A through F.

O. Supply�Type, Trap�Seal Primer Device:

1. Manufacturers: One of the following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.



P. Drainage�Type, Trap�Seal Primer Device:


a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P�trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection.

3. Size: NPS 1�1/4 minimum.

4. Material: Chrome�plated, cast brass.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and

outlet.

C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

D. Install temperature�actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets

and with shutoff valve on outlet.

E. Install Y�pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure�reducing valve.

F. Set nonfreeze, nondraining�type post hydrants in concrete or pavement.

G. Set freeze�resistant yard hydrants with riser pipe in concrete or pavement. Do not encase

canister in concrete.

H. Install water�hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI�WH 201.

I. Install supply�type, trap�seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor�drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for

proper flow.

J. Install drainage�type, trap�seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down

toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor�drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test each reduced�pressure�principle backflow preventer according to authorities having

jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.



2. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.

3. Prepare test and inspection reports.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 � 1

SECTION 221316 � SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


2. For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of

VOC content.

3. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.

1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the

following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to

requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary

waste service and do not proceed without written permission.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10�foot head of water.

2. Waste, Force�Main Piping: 100 psig.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand

the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

D. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for

plastic piping components.

2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Hubless Cast�Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301, with ASTM C 1277

shielded couplings.



B. PVC Plastic, DWV Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2665, Schedule 40, plain ends with PVC

socket�type, DWV pipe fittings.

1. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

a. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 220513 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic


B. Install cast�iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

C. Install wall penetration system at each pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make

installation watertight. Comply with requirements in Section 220513 "Common Work Results

for Plumbing" for wall penetration systems.

1. Sleeves are not required for cast�iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs�on�grade

if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

D. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long�sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short�sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long�turn,

double Y�branch and 1/8�bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

E. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

F. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.



2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

G. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

H. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

I. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


J. Comply with requirements in Section 220513 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic

piping joint construction.

K. Comply with requirements in Section 220513 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for pipe

hanger and support devices.

3.2 PIPE SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground Applications: Hubless, cast�iron soil pipe and fittings or PVC plastic, DWV pipe

and fittings with solvent�cemented joints.

B. Belowground Applications: Hubless, cast�iron soil pipe and fittings or PVC plastic, DWV pipe

and drainage�pattern fittings with cemented joints.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 � 1

SECTION 221319 � SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


a. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for grease

interceptors.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Cleanouts,:

1. Application: Floor cleanout Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

2. Clamping Device: Not required.

3. Outlet Connection: Inside calk.

4. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.

5. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel�bronze, copper alloy.

7. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

8. Top�Loading Classification: Light Duty.

A. Cleanouts,:

1. Application: Wall cleanout Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

2. Clamping Device: Not required.

3. Outlet Connection: Inside calk.

4. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.

5. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel�bronze, copper alloy.

7. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.


B. Floor Drains,:


SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 � 2


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Gray iron.

5. Seepage Flange: Required.

6. Clamping Device: Required.

7. Outlet: Bottom.

8. Exposed Surfaces and Interior Lining: Not required.

9. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

10. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

11. Top Shape: Round.


13. Trap Material: Cast iron.

14. Trap Pattern: Deep�seal P�trap.

15. Trap Features: Trap seal primer valve drain connection.

C. Air�Gap Fittings: ; ASME A112.1.2, chrome�plated brass cover.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers.

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install floor�drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Install air�gap fittings on draining�type backflow preventers and on indirect�waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.



FUEL�FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 � 1

SECTION 223400 � FUEL�FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic�water heater indicated.

2. Documentation indicating that units comply with applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 7, "Service Water Heating."

3. Domestic�Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to


4. Operation and maintenance data.

B. Warranties: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace

water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Substantial

Completion. Failures include, but are not limited to, tanks and elements.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic�water heaters shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel�fired, domestic�water heaters to

comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components � Health Effects."

E. Gas�Fired Water Heaters: Bear AGA certification label.

F. Comply with requirements of applicable NSF, AWWA, or FDA and EPA regulatory standards

for tasteless and odorless, potable�water�tank linings.

G. Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed in ASHRAE 90.2, "Energy Efficient Design

of New Low�Rise Residential Buildings."


FUEL�FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223400 � 2

2.2 WATER HEATERS, GENERAL

A. Insulation: Suitable for operating temperature and required insulating value.

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire tank except connections and controls.

B. Anode Rods: Factory installed, replaceable magnesium.

C. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4�M. Include

relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less than water heater

working�pressure rating. Select relief valve with sensing element that extends into tank.

D. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005. Factory or field installed.

2.3 GAS�FIRED WATER HEATERS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following:

1. American Water Heaters.

2. Apollo HydroHeat & Cooling; a division of State Industries.

3. Bradford White Corporation.

4. Lochinvar Corporation.

5. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

B. Household, Storage, Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.10.1/CSA 4.1. Steel with 150�psig

working�pressure rating; with adjustable thermostat; automatic gas�ignition system, draft hood.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install heaters on concrete base.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

B. Install temperature and pressure relief valves and extend to closest floor drain.

C. Install vacuum relief valves in cold�water�inlet piping.

D. Install shutoff valves and unions at hot� and cold�water piping connections.

E. Make piping connections with dielectric fittings where dissimilar piping materials are joined.

F. Connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54. Connect gas vent and draft hoods and

diverters where required. Extend to outside and terminate in vent cap.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 � 1

SECTION 224000 � PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:

1. Product Data for each type of plumbing fixture, including trim, fittings, accessories,

appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports.

2. Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable

Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90�480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public

Law 101�336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with

disabilities.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102�486, "Energy Policy

Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components � Health Effects,"

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

2.2 WATER CLOSET

A. Vitreous�China Water Closet: Elongated, siphon�jet type, floor�mounted, floor outlet with

close�coupled, gravity�type tank.

1. Manufacturers: One of the following:]

a. American Standard Companies, Inc.

b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.

d. Eljer.

e. Kohler Co.

f. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc.

g. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.

h. TOTO USA, Inc.



2.3 TOILET SEAT

A. Toilet Seat: Elongated, solid plastic closed front with cover with bumpers and hardware,

Residential class.



b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.

c. Church Seats.

d. Eljer.

e. Kohler Co.

f. Olsonite Corp.

2.4 LAVATORY

A. Vitreous�China Lavatory: Counter�mounting,.



b. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.

d. Eljer.

e. Kohler Co.

f. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc.


h. TOTO USA, Inc.

B. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1; solid brass.



b. Delta Faucet Company.

c. Eljer.

d. Moen, Inc.

e. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.

2. Type: Center set with inlets on 4�inch centers and with pop�up waste.

3. Finish: Polished chrome�plate.

4. Handle(s): Single�lever toggle.

5. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.

C. Drain: Pop up with NPS 1�1/4 tailpiece, included with faucet.

D. Trap: Chrome�plated, and with slip�joint inlet and wall flange.

E. Supply and Drain Insulation: Soft�plastic covering; removable at stops.



2.5 BATHTUB

A. Enameled, Cast�Iron Bathtub: With slip�resistant bathing surface,.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Eljer.

b. Jacuzzi, Inc.

c. Kohler Co.

B. Mixing�Valve Faucet and Miscellaneous Fittings: Single�lever, pressure�balance antiscald�type

faucet; maximum 2.5�gpm flow rate.



b. Delta Faucet Company.

c. Eljer.

d. Kohler Co.

e. Moen, Inc.

f. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.


2. Include tub filler spout; lever�operated, pop�up waste and overflow; shower diverter

valve; shower head, arm, and flange; and ball, gate, or globe valves on supplies if check

stops are not included with faucet.

3. Body Material: Solid brass.


5. Shower Arm, Flow�Control Fitting: 2 gpm.

6. Hand�held showers.

2.6 SINK

A. Stainless�Steel Sink: Counter�mounting, self�rimming type, 0.063 inch thick, two bowl(s).

1. Manufacturers:

a. Dayton Products, Inc.

b. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

c. Just Manufacturing Company.

d. Kohler Co.

e. Moen, Inc.

f. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.

B. Left Bowl:

1. Dimensions: .

2. Drain(s): 3�1/2�inch removable, stainless�steel crumb cup with NPS 1�1/2 tubular�brass

tailpiece.

3. Drain location: Centered in bowl.



C. Right Bowl:

1. Dimensions: .

2. Drain(s): 3�1/2�inch removable, chrome�plated, brass crumb cup with outlet for disposer.

3. Drain location: Centered in bowl.

D. Faucet: Solid brass. Maximum 2.5�gpm flow rate.

1. Manufacturers:


b. Bradley Corporation.

c. Chicago Faucets.

d. Delta Faucet Company.

e. Eljer.

f. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

g. Grohe America, Inc.

h. Just Manufacturing Company.

i. Kohler Co.

j. Moen, Inc.

k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Type: Center set with inlets on 4�inch centers, with spray.


4. Handle(s): Single�lever toggle.

5. Spout: Swing with aerator 2�gpm laminar flow.

E. Disposer: 1/2 hp, UL labeled.

1. Manufacturers:


b. In�Sink�Erator; a div. of Emerson Electric Co.

c. KitchenAid.

d. Maytag Co.


3.1 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install fitting insulation kits on fixtures for people with disabilities.

B. Install fixtures with flanges and gasket seals.

C. Install tanks for accessible, tank�type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of

compartment.

D. Fasten floor�mounted fixtures to substrate. Fasten fixtures having holes for securing fixture to

wall construction, to reinforcement built into walls.

E. Fasten counter�mounting plumbing fixtures to casework.



F. Secure supplies to supports or substrate within pipe space behind fixture.

G. Install individual supply inlets, supply stops, supply risers, and tubular brass traps with

cleanouts at fixture.

H. Install water�supply stop valves in accessible locations.

I. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on

indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install disposers in sink outlets. Install switch where indicated, or in wall adjacent to sink if

location is not indicated.

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and

within cabinets and millwork. Use deep�pattern escutcheons where required to conceal

protruding pipe fittings.

L. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary�type, one�part,

mildew�resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

M. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing

equipment. Install insulation on supplies and drains of fixtures for people with disabilities.

N. Ground equipment.



GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 226313 � 1

SECTION 226313 � GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

PART 1 � GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Nitrous oxide piping, designated "medical nitrous oxide."

2. Oxygen piping, designated "medical oxygen."

3. Owner will furnish gases for medical gas concentration testing specified in this Section.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 226400 "Medical Gas Alarms" for combined medical air, vacuum, and gas

alarms.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For gas manifolds, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

C. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical gas piping materials comply

with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive�pressure medical gas systems.

D. Brazing certificates.

E. Field quality�control reports.



1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For medical gas piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Medical Gas Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to

ASSE Standard #6010 for medical�gas�system installers.

2. Shape�Memory�Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and

approved by manufacturer.

3. Licensed in the State of Utah for medical gas piping installation

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the medical gas piping testing indicated, that is an NRTL, and that is

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical�gas�system

inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical�gas�system verifiers.

C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,

Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing

Procedure and Performance Qualification."

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Medical nitrous oxide operating at 50 to 55 psig.

B. Medical oxygen operating at 50 to 55 psig.


A. Seismic Performance: Medical gas manifolds shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the medical gas manifolds will remain in place without

separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.

2.3 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical gas piping materials.



B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type K, seamless, drawn temper that has been

manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service; or according to CGA G�4.1

for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED,"

"OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and blue for Type L tube.

C. Wrought�Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder�joint pressure type that has been manufacturer

cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to CGA G�4.1.

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP�123, wrought�copper or cast�copper alloy.

E. Cast�Copper�Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

1. Pipe�Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos�free, 1/8�inch

maximum thickness, full�face type.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

F. Shape�Memory�Metal Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:

a. Aerofit, Inc.

2. Description: Cryogenic compression fitting made of nickel�titanium, shape�memory

alloy, and that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service

according to CGA G�4.1.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper�phosphorus alloys.

B. Threaded�Joint Tape: PTFE.

2.5 VALVES

A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to

CGA G�4.1 for oxygen service.

B. Zone�Valve Box Assemblies: Box with medical gas valves, tube extensions, and gages.

1. Zone�Valve Boxes:

a. Steel Box with Aluminum Cover:

1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following:

a) Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

b) Amico Corporation.

c) Ohio Medical Corporation.



b. Description: Formed steel box with cover, anchors for recessed mounting, holes

with grommets in box sides for tubing extension protection, and of size for single

or multiple valves with pressure gages and in sizes required to permit manual

operation of valves. Medical air and medical vacuum tubing, valves, and gages

may be incorporated in zone valve boxes for medical gases.

1) Interior Finish: Factory�applied white enamel.

2) Cover Plate: Aluminum or stainless steel with frangible or removable

windows.

3) Valve�Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that

includes rooms served, according to NFPA 99.

C. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

b. Amico Corporation.

c. NIBCO INC.

d. Ohio Medical Corporation.

2. Standard: MSS SP�110.

3. Description: Three�piece body, brass or bronze.


5. Ball: Full�port, chrome�plated brass.

6. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

7. Handle: Lever.

8. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.

9. Ends: Manufacturer�installed ASTM B 819, copper�tube extensions and manufacturer�

installed ASTM B 819, copper�tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper�tube

extension.

D. Check Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

b. Amico Corporation.

c. Ohio Medical Corporation.

2. Description: In�line pattern, bronze.


4. Operation: Spring loaded.

5. Ends: Manufacturer�installed ASTM B 819, copper�tube extensions.



2.6 MEDICAL GAS SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

2. Amico Corporation.

3. Ohio Medical Corporation.

4. Oxequip Health Industries; a division of Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

B. General Requirements for Medical Gas Service Connections: For specific medical gas pressure

and suction service listed. Include roughing�in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover

plates. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or

assembly with cover plate. Furnish recessed�type units made for concealed piping unless


C. Roughing�in Assembly:

1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.

2. Brass�body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when

primary valve is removed. Suction inlets to be without secondary valve.

3. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage.

4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking and tube�

end dust cap.

D. Finishing Assembly:

1. Brass housing with primary check valve.

2. Double seals that will prevent gas leakage.

3. Cover plate with gas�service label.

E. Quick�Coupler Pressure Service Connections: Outlets for nitrous oxide and oxygen with

noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services, constructed to

permit one�handed connection and removal of equipment, and with positive�locking ring that

retains equipment stem in valve during use.

F. Cover Plates: One piece, aluminum or stainless steel and permanent, color�coded, identifying

label matching corresponding service.

2.7 MEDICAL GAS MANIFOLDS


following:

1. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.

2. Amico Corporation.

3. Ohio Medical Corporation.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for high�pressure medical gas cylinders.



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Central Control�Panel Unit: Weatherproof cabinet, supply and delivery pressure gages,

electrical alarm�system connections and transformer, indicator lights or devices, manifold

connection, pressure changeover switch, line�pressure regulator, shutoff valves, and safety

valve.

E. Manifold and Headers: Duplex, nonferrous�metal header for number of cylinders indicated,

divided into two equal banks. Units include design for 2000�psig minimum inlet pressure.

Include cylinder�bank headers with inlet (pigtail) connections complying with CGA V�1,

individual inlet check valves, shutoff valve, pressure regulator, check valve, and pressure gage.

F. Operation: Automatic, pressure�switch�activated changeover from one cylinder bank to the

other when first bank becomes exhausted, without line�pressure fluctuation or resetting of

regulators and without supply interruption by shutoff of either cylinder�bank header.

G. Mounting: Wall with mounting brackets for manifold control cabinet and headers.

H. Label manifold control unit with permanent label identifying medical gas type and system

operating pressure.

I. Medical Nitrous Oxide Manifolds: For 3 cylinders and 55�psig line pressure, with electric heater

or orifice design that will prevent freezing during high demand.

J. Medical Oxygen Manifolds: For 3 cylinders and 55�psig line pressure.

K. Medical Gas Cylinders: Furnished by Owner.

2.8 NITROGEN

A. Comply with USP 32 � NF 27 for oil�free dry nitrogen.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer�cleaned and �capped fittings or tubing are not

available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have

supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, perform the following

procedures:

1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease,

and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to

CGA G�4.1.

2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline�cleaner�water solution of

sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of

water.



a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.

b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of gas

piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of medical gas piping.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than

system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless


H. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

K. Install medical gas piping to medical gas service connections specified in this Section, to

medical gas service connections in equipment specified in this Section, and to equipment

specified in other Sections requiring medical gas service.

L. Install medical gas service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing�in assembly to

substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing�in assembly.

M. Connect gas piping to gas sources and to gas outlets and equipment requiring gas service.

N. Install unions in copper tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each specialty

and piece of equipment.

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."



3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to gas laboratory and healthcare equipment and

specialties.

B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of gas flow from laboratory and healthcare gas

supplies.

C. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for

multiple valves that serve same area or function.

D. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Arrange valves so largest valve is lowest. Rotate

valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.

E. Install pressure regulators on gas piping where reduced pressure is required.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

B. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.

C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"

"Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil�free, dry nitrogen during brazing.

D. Shape�Memory�Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to

procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape�memory�metal coupling

joints.

3.5 GAS SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION

A. Install nitrogen pressure�control panels in walls. Attach to substrate.

B. Install gas manifolds anchored to substrate.

C. Install gas cylinders and connect to manifold piping.

D. Install gas manifolds with seismic restraints.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.

B. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

C. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.



2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

D. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and

Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.

E. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

F. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

G. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double�rod hangers, with 3/8�inch� minimum rods.

H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

5. NPS 1�1/4: 108 inches with 3/8�inch rod.

6. NPS 1�1/2: 10 feet with 3/8�inch rod.

7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8�inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for healthcare medical gas piping systems according to

NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color�coding for piping products where

required by NFPA 99:

1. Nitrogen: White letters on black background.

2. Nitrous Oxide: White letters on blue background.

3. Oxygen: White letters on green background or green letters on white background.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITY MEDICAL GAS

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Medical Gas Piping Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and

certification of medical gas piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and

certification of medical vacuum piping systems.

2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99

and ASSE Standard #6010:

a. Initial blow down.

b. Initial pressure test.

c. Cross�connection test.



d. Piping purge test.

e. Standing pressure test for positive�pressure medical gas piping.

f. Standing pressure test for vacuum systems.

g. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99,

ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:

a. Standing pressure test.

b. Individual�pressurization or pressure�differential cross�connection test.

c. Valve test.

d. Master and area alarm tests.

e. Piping purge test.

f. Piping particulate test.

g. Piping purity test.

h. Final tie�in test.

i. Operational pressure test.

j. Medical gas concentration test.

k. Medical air purity test.

l. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.

m. Verify medical gas supply sources.

4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been

performed and certify report results. Include the following:

a. Inspections performed.

b. Procedures, materials, and gases used.

c. Test methods used.

d. Results of tests.

C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified

above.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 PROTECTION

A. Protect tubing from damage.

B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation"

Article.

3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory�metal couplings.

B. Medical Gas Piping : Type K, copper tube; wrought�copper fittings; and brazed joints.



3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer�installed ASTM B 819, copper�tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer�installed ASTM B 819, copper�tube extensions with

pressure gage on one copper�tube extension.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 � 1

SECTION 230500 � COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping Equipment:

1. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

a. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, and system contents.

b. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

c. Design seismic�restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain

approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized�Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain

ends.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

C. Galvanized�Steel Sheet: 0.0239�inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.

D. Stack�Seal Fitting: Manufactured, cast�iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic�cement grout.



2.4 ESCUTCHEONS AND FLOOR PLATES

A. One�Piece, Deep�Pattern Type: Deep�drawn, box�shaped brass with chrome�plated finish and

spring�clip fasteners.

B. One�Piece, Stamped�Steel Type: With chrome�plated finish and spring�clip fasteners.

C. One�Piece Floor Plates: Cast�iron flange.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC

A. Carbon�Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP�58, Types 1 through 58, factory�fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous�thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Fastener Systems:

1. Verify suitability of fasteners in this article for use in lightweight concrete or concrete

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

2. Powder�Actuated Fasteners: Threaded�steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull�out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

3. Mechanical�Expansion Anchors: Insert�wedge�type, zinc�coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull�out, tension, and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

C. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon�steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

2. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory�mixed and �packaged, dry, hydraulic�cement, nonshrink

and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

a. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

b. Design Mix: 5000�psi, 28�day compressive strength.


3.1 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Install piping free of sags and bends.

B. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.



C. Sleeves:

1. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and

walls.

2. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and

walls are constructed.

a. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve�seal

system.

3. Install stack�sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

4. Fire�Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with

requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078446 "Penetration Firestopping."

D. Escutcheons & Floor Plates:

1. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

2. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and


3. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment�room floors.

4. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and


E. Install unions at final connection to each piece of equipment.

F. Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in gas

piping.

G. Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in

water piping.

3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with MSS SP�69 and MSS SP�89. Install building attachments within concrete or to

structural steel.

B. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems.

C. Install powder�actuated fasteners and mechanical�expansion anchors in concrete after concrete

is cured. Do not use in lightweight concrete or in slabs less than 4 inches thick.

D. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

E. Horizontal�Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.



2. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off�

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

F. Vertical�Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Specification Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to

NPS 20.

2. Carbon� or Alloy�Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,

NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

3.3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

E. Mix and install grout for pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Place grout,

completely filling equipment bases.



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 � 1

SECTION 230513 � COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible

with the following:

a. Motor controllers.

b. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

c. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

d. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in

plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

above sea level.

C. Single Phase Motors:

1. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

a. Permanent�split capacitor.

b. Split phase.

c. Capacitor start, inductor run.

d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

2. Multispeed Motors: Variable�torque, permanent�split�capacitor type.

3. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial

and thrust loading.

4. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded�pole type.

5. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of

motor insulation. Thermal�protection device shall automatically reset when motor

temperature returns to normal range.


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 � 2

PART 3 � EXECUTION (Not Used)



HVAC INSULATION 230700 � 1

SECTION 230700 � HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


2. For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

B. Quality Assurance: Labeled with maximum flame�spread index of 25 and maximum smoke�

developed index of 50 according to ASTM E 84.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Surface�Burning Characteristics:

1. Indoor Insulation and related materials: To be factory labeled designating maximum

flame�spread index of 25 or less, and smoke�developed index of 50 or less according to

ASTM E 84.

2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

B. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed�cell, sponge� or expanded�rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

C. Mineral�Fiber Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290,

Type I.

D. Mineral�Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA

Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB; and having factory�applied

ASJ. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k�value) at 100 deg F is

0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less.

E. Polyolefin Insulation: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with

ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for

sheet materials.

F. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL�A�24179A, Type II, Class I.



1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

G. Mineral�Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL�A�3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when


H. Vapor�Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient

services; comply with MIL�PRF�19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


I. Factory�Applied Jackets: When factory�applied jackets are indicated, comply with the

following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft�paper, fiberglass�reinforced scrim with aluminum�foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum�foil, fiberglass�reinforced scrim with kraft�paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

J. ASJ Tape: White vapor�retarder tape matching factory�applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,


K. FSK Tape: Foil�face, vapor�retarder tape matching factory�applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;



3.1 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association's "National

Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards" for insulation installation on pipes and

equipment.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire�Rated Wall, Partition, and Floor Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations. Seal penetrations. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation:

1. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation

that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

2. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Install mitered sections of pipe

insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.



E. Mineral�Fiber Insulation Installation:

1. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: Where vapor barriers are indicated,

seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor�barrier mastic and joint

sealant.

2. For insulation with factory�applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

3. For insulation with factory�applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer and seal with vapor�barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

4. Blanket and Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive

and insulation pins.

5. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier.

F. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Exposed supply and return air located in nonconditioned space.

G. Plenums and Ducts Not Insulated:

1. Metal ducts with duct liner.

2. Factory�insulated plenums and casings.

3. Flexible connectors.

4. Vibration�control devices.

5. Factory�insulated access panels and doors.

H. Piping Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawlspaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome�plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.2 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Exposed duct insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick.

2. Mineral�Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 1.5�lb/cu. ft. nominal density.



FACILITY NATURAL�GAS PIPING 231123 � 1

SECTION 231123 � NATURAL�GAS PIPING

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


2. Shop Drawings: For facility natural�gas piping layout.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Minimum Operating�Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural�Gas System Pressure within Building: One distribution pressure. More than 0.5 psig,

but not more than 2.0 psig.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable�Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought�Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass�to�iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends.

4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory�applied, three�layer coating of

epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

B. Corrugated, Stainless�Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1; include flame�retardant PE

coating, copper�alloy threaded ends, and striker plates.

2.3 SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed�Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.



2.4 VALVES

A. General Requirements for Metallic Manual Gas Shutoff Valves: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP�78.

1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

2. Plug: Bronze.

3. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.

4. Pressure Class: 125 psig.

5. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


6. Service: Suitable for natural�gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

C. Valve Boxes: Cast iron, two sections, with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5

inches in diameter and cover with "GAS" lettering.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements: Single stage, steel jacketed, and corrosion resistant. Include elevation

compensator.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.80; 2�psig� maximum inlet pressure. Factory� or field�

installed, stainless�steel screen in vent opening if not connected to vent piping.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18; 1�psig� maximum inlet pressure. Regulator may

include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having

jurisdiction.


3.1 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic


B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Piping Installed under Buildings: Install piping under the building in containment conduit

constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from

containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with a weatherproof vent cap.

D. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.



E. Fire�Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

F. Install gas stops for shutoff to appliances with low�pressure gas supply.

G. Install natural�gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

H. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side

down.

I. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

J. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each

piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

K. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated

valve.

L. Connect gas piping to equipment and appliances with shutoff valves and unions. Install gas

valve upstream from and within 72 inches of each appliance using gas. Install union or flanged

connections downstream from valves.

M. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure

protection devices to the outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

N. Do not use natural�gas piping as grounding electrode.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

B. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes

and welding operators.

C. Joints in Steel Piping with Protective Coating: Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to

cover, seal, and protect joints.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless�steel

tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate

for servicing and testing.

C. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.



3.4 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable�iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:


3.5 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND

LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:


B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:


3.6 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2�1/2 and larger shall be the following:


C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:




HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 233100 � 1

SECTION 233100 � HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


2. Documentation indicating that duct systems and accessories comply with ASHRAE 62.1,

Section 5 � "Systems and Equipment."

3. Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 � "Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning." and Section 6.4.4 � "HVAC

System Construction and Insulation."

4. Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.4 �

"Ventilation System Start�up."

5. For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards � Metal and Flexible."

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads

and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards � Metal and Flexible"

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 � "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 � "Construction and System Start�up."

E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.4.4 � "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

F. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

G. Comply with NFPA 96 for ducts connected to commercial kitchen hoods.

H. Comply with UL 181 for ducts and closures.



2.2 DUCTS

A. Galvanized�Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot�dip galvanized coating.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

B. Joint and Seam Tape, and Sealant: Comply with UL 181A.

C. Rectangular Metal Duct Fabrication: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards � Metal and Flexible."

D. Fibrous�Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.

1. Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Airstream surface coated with an antimicrobial erosion�resistant coating.

3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical

attachment, or welding attachment.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Volume Dampers and Control Dampers: Single�blade and multiple opposed�blade dampers,

standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications; factory fabricated

and complete with required hardware and accessories.

B. Fire Dampers: Rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL; factory fabricated and

complete with required hardware and accessories.

C. Ceiling Fire Dampers: Labeled according to UL 555C by an NRTL and complying with

construction details for tested floor� and roof�ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire

Resistance Directory." Provide factory�fabricated units complete with required hardware and

accessories.

D. Flexible Connectors: Flame�retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives

complying with UL 181, Class 1.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards � Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards � Metal and Flexible":

1. Outdoor, Supply�Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

2. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.



3. Outdoor, Return�Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Unconditioned Space, Supply�Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2�Inch wgand Lower: Seal

Class B.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply�Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2�Inch wg:

Seal Class A.

6. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

7. Unconditioned Space, Return�Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

8. Conditioned Space, Supply�Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2�Inch wgand Lower: Seal

Class C.

9. Conditioned Space, Supply�Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2�Inch wg: Seal

Class B.

10. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Return�Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

C. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces.

D. Avoid passing through electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

E. Support ducts to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards � Metal and

Flexible," Ch. 4, "Hangers and Supports."

F. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards � Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous�glass ducts.

G. Install volume and control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to

avoid erosion of duct liner.

H. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

I. Install fusible links in fire dampers.

3.2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. Balance airflow within distribution systems, including submains, branches, and terminals to

indicated quantities.



HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 � 1

SECTION 233423 � HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


PART 2 � PRODUCTS


A. Products shall be licensed to use the AMCA�Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CEILING�MOUNTED VENTILATORS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following:

1. Broan�NuTone LLC.

2. Broan�NuTone LLC; NuTone Inc.

3. Carnes Company.

4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

5. JencoFan.

6. Loren Cook Company.

7. PennBarry.

8. Twin City,

B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan

wheel shall be removable for service.

D. Grille: Aluminum, louvered or egg�crate grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew

attachment to fan housing.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for

motor plug�in.

F. Accessories:


HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 � 2

1. Manual Starter Switch: Single�pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.

2. Isolation: Rubber�in�shear vibration isolators.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

B. Ceiling�Mounted Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.

C. Ground power ventilators.



BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 � 1

SECTION 235100 � BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 � GENERAL


A. Submittals:


PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 LISTED TYPE B AND BW VENTS

A. Description: Double�wall metal vents tested according to UL 441 and rated for 480 deg F

continuously for Type B, or 550 deg F continuously for Type BW; with neutral or negative flue

pressure complying with NFPA 211 and suitable for certified gas�fired appliances.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hart & Cooley, Inc.

b. Heat�Fab, Inc.

c. Metal�Fab, Inc.

d. Simpson Dura�Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co.

e. Tru�Flex Metal Hose Corp.

B. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least 1/4�inch airspace.

C. Inner Shell: Type 1100, aluminum.

D. Outer Jacket: Galvanized steel.

E. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft�hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof

flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated

from similar materials and designs as vent�pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.

1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude 90 percent of rainfall.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install vents according to stipulated minimum clearances from combustibles.


BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 � 2

B. Seal between sections of positive�pressure vents using only sealants recommended by

manufacturer.

C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all

accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest

point piped to nearest drain.



PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL�STATION AIR�HANDLING UNITS 237413 � 1

SECTION 237413 � PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL�STATION AIR�HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 � GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central�station air�handling units (rooftop units) with

the following components and accessories:

1. Direct�expansion cooling.

2. Gas furnace.

3. Economizer outdoor� and return�air damper section.

4. Integral, space temperature controls.

5. Roof curbs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Outdoor�Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor�air stream to reject heat during

cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the

air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the

system.

B. Outdoor�Air Refrigerant�Coil Fan: The outdoor�air refrigerant�coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air"

is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated

through the system.

C. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central�

station air�handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on

the roof or on a concrete base on ground.

D. Supply�Air Fan: The fan providing supply�air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as

the air entering a space from air�conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.

E. Supply�Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply�air stream to absorb heat (provide

cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating

operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air�conditioning, heating, or

ventilating apparatus.


A. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined

according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."



1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities,

dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality�control test reports.

B. Warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. ARI Compliance:

1. Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for

RTUs.

2. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs.

B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigerant system safety.

2. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 � "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 � "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 � "Heating, Ventilating, and Air�Conditioning."

D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.



1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years

from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less

than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Solid�State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less

than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three

years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 � PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. AAON.

2. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp.

3. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International.

4. McQuay International; Daikin Industries.

5. Trane.

6. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.2 CASING

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced insulated panels,

fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between

sections sealed.

B. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory�painted finish, with pitched roof panels

and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs.

1. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.079 inch thick.

C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Thickness: 1 inch.

3. Liner materials shall have air�stream surface coated with an erosion� and temperature�

resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.

4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized�steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches

deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1.



1. Double�Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal

moisture tight.

2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.

3. Pan�Top Surface Coating: Corrosion�resistant compound.

E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

2.3 FANS

A. Direct�Driven Supply�Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently

lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted�steel

wheels, and galvanized� or painted�steel fan scrolls.

B. Belt�Driven Supply�Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently

lubricated, single�speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the

casing. Aluminum or painted�steel wheels, and galvanized� or painted�steel fan scrolls.

C. Condenser�Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor.

D. Relief�Air Fan: Forward curved, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor.

E. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal mounting frame and

attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components

with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when fan�mounted frame and RTU�mounted

frame are anchored to building structure.

F. Fan Motor: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

2.4 COILS

A. Supply�Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum�plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing�type

vertical distributor.

2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate

pan.

3. Coil Split: Interlaced.

4. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion�resistant coating formed with

pitch and drain connections complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Outdoor�Air Refrigerant Coil:

1. Aluminum�plate fin and seamless copper tube in steel casing with equalizing�type

vertical distributor.

2. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate

pan.



2.5 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS

A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One.

B. Compressor: Hermetic, scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and

high�temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater.

C. Refrigeration Specialties:

1. Refrigerant: R�410A.

2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.

3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.

4. Manual�reset high�pressure safety switch.

5. Automatic�reset low�pressure safety switch.

6. Minimum off�time relay.

7. Automatic�reset compressor motor thermal overload.

8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.

2.6 AIR FILTRATION

A. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value

(MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Pleated: Minimum [90] Insert number percent arrestance, and MERV 7.

2.7 GAS FURNACE

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54.

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.

B. Burners: Stainless steel.

1. Fuel: Natural gas.

2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot�surface igniter with flame sensor.

3. High�Altitude Kit: For Project elevations more than 2000 feet above sea level.

C. Heat�Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

D. Venting: Gravity vented.

E. Power Vent: Integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

F. Safety Controls:

1. Gas Control Valve: Single stage.

2. Gas Train: Single�body, regulated, redundant, 24�V ac gas valve assembly containing

pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.



2.8 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor� and Return�Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel� or opposed�blade galvanized�steel dampers

mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized�steel operating rod in reinforced

cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers

operate simultaneously.

1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief�Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.

2.9 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION

A. Provide for single connection of power to unit with unit�mounted disconnect switch accessible

from outside unit and control�circuit transformer with built�in overcurrent protection.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital

Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC

DDC."

B. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control�voltage transformer.

2. Wall�mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features:

a. Heat�cool�off switch.

b. Fan on�auto switch.

c. Fan�speed switch.

d. Automatic changeover.

e. Adjustable deadband.

f. Concealed set point.

g. Concealed indication.

h. Degree F indication.

i. Unoccupied�period�override push button.

j. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and

unoccupied periods, and output room temperature, supply�air temperature,

operating mode, and status.

C. Interface Requirements for HVAC Instrumentation and Control System:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.

2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation and diagnostic

code storage.



2.11 ACCESSORIES

A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner

compartment.

B. Duplex, 115�V, non�powered.

C. Coil guards of painted, galvanized�steel wire.

2.12 ROOF CURBS

A. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion�protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factory�

installed wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards.

1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.

b. Thickness: 1�1/2 inches.

2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal

surface of curb.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner

when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in

cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air�stream surface coated with a

temperature�resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric

depending on service air velocity.

d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

B. Curb Height: 14 inches.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's

"Low�Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail

for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof

penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 077200 "Roof

Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete

base with anchor bolts.

B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest

roof drain or area drain.

C. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance.



1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 231123 "Facility Natural�

Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with

union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

D. Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the

general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb.

2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under

entire roof curb.

3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 233300

"Air Duct Accessories."

4. Install return�air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory�authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report

results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory�authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for

compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie�down straps.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air�

distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TABLE OF CONTENTS June, 2013 260000 – 1 Bid Documents

TABLE OF CONTENTS ITEM SECTION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260001 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 260070 ELECTRICAL SUPPORT & SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 260072 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 260110 CONDUCTORS & CABLES 260120 ELECTRICAL BOXES & FITTINGS 260135 WIRING DEVICES 260140 MOTOR STARTERS 260155 PANELBOARDS 260160 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 260170 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 260180 SPD SYSTEMS 260289 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260435 GROUNDING 260452 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 260510 LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 260560 TELEPHONE/DATA SYSTEMS 270740 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 280721

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 260001 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260001 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents also apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The contract documents indicate the extent of electrical work. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, supervision and service necessary for a complete electrical system as described in divisions 26, 27, and 28.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Other Divisions relating to electrical work apply to the work of this section. See other applicable Divisions including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Division 1 - General and Supplementary Conditions 2. Division 2 - Existing Conditions 3. Division 3 - Concrete 4. Division 5 - Metals 5. Division 6 - Wood, Plastics, and Composites 6. Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 7. Division 8 - Openings 8. Division 9 - Finishes 9. Division 21 - Fire Suppression 10. Division 22 - Plumbing 11. Division 23 - Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning 12. Division 27 - Communications 13. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security

1.4 INTERPRETATIONS OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Prior to bidding the job, submit requests for clarification in writing to the Architect/Engineer prior to issuance of the final addendum.

B. After signing the contract, provide all materials, labor, and equipment to meet the intent, purpose, and

function of the contract documents.

C. The following terms used in Division 26, 27, and 28 documents are defined as follows:

1. "Provide" - Means furnish, install, and connect, unless otherwise indicated. 2. "Furnish" - Means purchase new and deliver in operating order to project site. 3. "Install" - Means to physically install the items in-place. 4. "Connect" - Means make final electrical connections for a complete operating piece of equipment.

This includes providing conduit, wire, terminations, etc. as applicable. 5. "Or Equivalent" - Means to provide equivalent equipment. Such equipment must be approved by


the Engineer prior to bidding. 1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE:

A. Visit the site and verify existing field conditions prior to submitting bid.

B. All costs arising from site conditions and/or preparation shall be included in the base bid. No additional charges will be allowed due to inadequate site inspection.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Perform work in accordance with all governing codes, rules, and regulations including the following minimum codes (latest editions or as otherwise accepted by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction):

1. National Electric Code (NEC) 2. International Building Code (IBC) 3. International Fire Code (IFC) 4. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 5. International Plumbing Code (IPC) 6. American Disability Act (ADA) 7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 8. Local Codes and Ordinances 9. The State Building Board Requirements 10. State Fire Marshall Requirements

B. Comply with all standards where applicable for equipment and materials including the following

minimum standards:

1. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 2. American Society for testing Materials (ASTM) 3. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) 4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 5. National Electrical Manufacturer's Institute (NEMA) 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 9. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 10. American Institute of Electrical Engineer's Electrical Power 11. Systems and Grounding in Commercial Construction 12. Illuminating Engineers Society (IES)

C. Provide new electrical equipment conforming to all requirements as set forth in the above standards.

Provide UL labeled equipment where such label is applicable.

D. Comply with all state and local codes and ordinances. When conflicts occur among codes, standards, drawings, and/or specifications, the most stringent requirements shall govern.

E. Obtain all permits, inspections, etc. required by authority having jurisdiction. Include all fees in bid.

Provide a certificate of approval to the owner's representative from the inspection authority at completion of the work.

1.7 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings: After the contract is awarded, but prior to manufacture or installation of any equipment,


submit eight (8) complete sets of shop drawings. Partially complete sets of shop drawings are not acceptable. Submit all shop drawings in one complete submittal package. Prior to submitting shop drawings, review and certify that they are in compliance with the contract documents; Sign all approved shop drawings. Allow a minimum of two weeks for architect/engineer to review shop drawings. Refer to architectural general provision section for additional requirements.

1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Submit four (4) complete sets of operating instruction and maintenance manuals for all equipment and

materials provided under Divisions 26, 27, and 28.

B. Provide manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions, cleaning and servicing requirements, serial and model number of each piece of equipment, complete list of replacement parts, performance curves and data, wiring diagrams, warranties, and vendor's name, address, and phone numbers. Do not submit information which describes several different items in addition to those items to be used, unless all relevant information is clearly identified. Assemble all data in completely indexed volume or volumes. Engrave the job title, and name, address, and phone numbers of the contractor on the front cover and on the spine. Incomplete O&M manuals will be returned to the contractor for corrections / additions.

1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Maintain on a daily basis a complete set of "Red-Lined Drawings", reflecting an accurate record of all work including addendums, revisions, and changes. Indicate precise dimensioned locations of all concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded conduit, junction boxes, etc. Record all "Red-Lined Drawing" information on a set of full sized prints of the contract drawings.

B. Certify the "Red Lined Drawings" for correctness. Indicate on each drawing the name of the general and

electrical contractors with signatures of each representative responsible for the work.

C. The electrical engineering design firm will create record (as-built) drawings from the certified red-lined drawings; however, the general and electrical contractors retain the responsibility for the accuracy of the record drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY:

A. Ensure that the electrical system installed under this contract is in proper working order and in compliance with drawings, specifications, and/or authorized changes and is free from electrical defects. Without additional charge, replace or repair, to satisfaction of the owner's representative, except from ordinary wear and tear, any part of the installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance or as otherwise indicated in individual sections, but in no case less than one year. Warranty incandescent and fluorescent lamps only for a period of two months from the date of substantial completion.

B. Provide complete warranty information for each item including beginning of warranty period, duration of

warranty, names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filling a claim and obtaining warranty services. Written warranties and guarantees are to be submitted separately as:

1. Originals bound in a binder clearly identified with the title, “WARRANTIES AND

GUARANTEES,” the project name, the project number, and the Contractor’s business name. 2. Electronic documents in *.pdf format.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:

A. All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name, and the approved testing laboratory such as the UL label in every case where a standard has been established for that particular material. Used materials are acceptable only if specifically indicated on drawings.

2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:

A. Provide only specified products or products approved by addendum. Substitutions will be considered if two copies of the proposal is received at the architect's/engineer's office eight (8) working days prior to the bid day. Include in the proposal the specified and proposed catalog numbers of the equipment under consideration and a catalog cut sheet(s) with pictorial and descriptive information. Certify that the equipment proposed is equal to that specified, that it has the same electrical and physical characteristics, compatible dimensions, and meets the functional intent of the contract documents.

B. It is the responsibility of the contractor to make all substituted equipment comply with the intent of the

contract documents and bear all cost associated with conflicts arising form the use of substituted equipment.

C. Provide samples if so required by the architect or engineer before or after bid day.

2.3 SPARE PARTS:

A. Provide spare parts as specified in Divisions 26, 27, and 28 sections. Deliver all spare parts to owner's representative prior to substantial completion.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL:

A. Workmanship: Provide only first class workmanship from competent workers. Defective materials or workmanship will not be allowed on the project. Provide competent supervision for the work to be accomplished. Keep same foreman on the job, unless a change is authorized by the engineer.

B. Coordination: Prior to construction, layout electrical work and coordinate work with other trades.

Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installation of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components. Coordinate with all utilities including power, communication, and data installations.

C. Provide cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. only as necessary for proper completion of the work. Do not

cut structural members unless authorization is issued in writing by the architect/engineer.

D. Repairs: Repair damage to building, grounds, or utilities as a result of work under this contract at no additional cost to the owner.


E. Dimensioning: Electrical drawings indicate locations for electrical equipment only in their approximate location, unless specifically dimensioned. Do not scale electrical drawings for dimensional information. Refer to architectural drawings and shop drawings where applicable for locations of all electrical equipment. Field verify all dimension on the job site.

F. Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, etc., required for installation of work specified in this

division.

G. Standards: Provide electrical installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

H. All workmen doing work of any nature on State of Utah projects must at all times carry their electrician's

license with them and show it upon request. The acceptable ratio of apprentice to journeyman electricians on the job is 1:1.

3.2 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION:

A. When it is clearly apparent that information is not adequately described in the construction documents or when a coordination problem exists, submit a request for information (RFI) through proper contractual channels. The electrical engineering design firm will provide a response through its contractual channel. Although verbal direction may be given to expedite changes, responses are not considered part of the contract documents until a change order has been issued and signed by the Owner or his designated representative. The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with proceeding on any change order that has not been approved by the Owner or his designated representative.

B. Any damages caused by construction delays due to frivolous RFI’s, will be born solely by the Contractor.

3.3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:

A. Provide all necessary guards or construction barriers and take all necessary precautions to insure the safety of life and property.

3.4 CLEAN:

A. Clean up all equipment, conduit, fittings, wire, packing cartons, plastic, and other debris that is a direct result of the installation of the work of this division, both during the execution, and at the conclusion, of the project. Keep the site clean and safe during the progress of the work. Clean fixtures, interior and exterior of all equipment, and raceways prior to final acceptance. Vacuum interior of all electrical panels and equipment. Correct any damaged equipment. Touch-up or repaint if necessary.

3.5 TEMPORARY POWER:

A. Make arrangements with the proper institution authority for all temporary electricity.

B. Provide temporary power, complete with metering and wiring for lighting and power outlets for construction tools and equipment. Report the initial meter reading to the owner/institution, or otherwise as may be directed.

C. Service shall be provided with a main disconnect and all 20 ampere receptacles protected by 20 amp GFI,

single-pole breakers. No attempt is made herein to specify construction power requirements for equipment in detail. Provide all electrical equipment and wiring as required.

D. As soon as permanent power and metering is available, the temporary power supply shall be disconnected


and removed from the project site.

E. All temporary wiring shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 305 and the State Industrial Commission.

3.6 POWER OUTAGES:

A. All power outages required for execution of this work shall occur during non-standard working hours and at the convenience of the owner. Any electrical service interruption will be coordinated at least 7 days in advance of the power shut-off. Include all costs for overtime work in bid. Coordinate all outages and proceed only after receiving authorization from the owner's representative. Keep all outages to an absolute minimum.

3.7 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:

A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete responsibility for all losses due to any cause whatsoever. Lost or damaged materials will be replaced at no additional cost to owner. Do not store materials and apparatus in any public thoroughfare or in any area on the site where such storage would constitute a hazard to persons in the vicinity. Protect completed work, work underway, and apparatus against loss or damage.

3.8 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK:

A. Verification: Prior to excavating, locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in a manner which will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling. Observe all State and Local codes prior to excavating. Do not disturb walls, footings, and other structural members in any way.

B. Protection: Provide barricades, warning signs, and illumination to protect persons from injury at

excavations. Provide temporary coverings and heat as necessary to protect bottoms of excavations from freezing and frost action. Do not install electrical work on frozen excavation bases or subbases.

C. Coordination: Do not excavate for electrical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay.

D. Excavated Materials: Temporarily store excavated materials near excavation in manner which will not

interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Dispose of and remove excavated materials which are either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or do not comply with the requirements for backfill material.

E. Burial Depths: Burial depths must comply with NEC Section 300-5 (or State of Utah requirements,

whichever is more stringent), unless noted otherwise on drawings. F. Excavation Permits: Obtain all shut-down and excavation permits as may be required for proper

completion of the work. 3.9 BACKFILL MATERIALS:

A. For buried conduits or cables (other than below slab-on-grade, or concrete-encased), provide 2" thickness of well-graded sand on all sides of conduits or cables.

B. For trench backfill to within 6" of final grade, provide soil material suitable for compacting to required

densities.

C. For top 6" of excavation, provide top soil.


D. Backfill excavations in 8" high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the following

densities (percent of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven hand-operated compaction equipment:

1. Lawn/Landscaped Areas: 85 percent for cohesive soils, 95 percent for cohesionless soils. 2. Paved Areas, other than roadways: 90 percent for cohesive soils, 95 percent for cohesionless

soils.

E. Where subsidence is observable at electrical work excavations during project warranty period, remove surface, add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore surface to original condition.

3.10 ROOF PENETRATIONS:

A. Where raceways and/or cables penetrate roofing, provide 26 gauge galvanized iron roof jack, sized to fit tightly to raceway and/or cable for weather-tight seal, and with flange extending a minimum of 9" under roofing on all sides. Seal opening between raceway and roof jack with approved sealant. Coordinate all work with division 7.

3.11 FIRE PENETRATION SEALS:

A. Seal all raceway and/or cable penetrations through fire-rated floors, wall, and ceilings to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or after fire. Provide penetration sealants and fittings of ratings to match the rating of the penetrated materials so that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required by Article 300-21 of the NEC.

B. Sealant Systems: Provide sealants, wall wraps, partitions, caps, and other accessories complying with

UL 1479 (ASTM E-814) from the following where applicable:

1. 3M Fire Barrier Sealing Penetration System 2. Chase Foam Fire Stop System 3. Thomas and Betts Flame Safe Fire Stop System 4. Nelson Fire Stop Products

C. Fittings: Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/I and CAFSF/I fire seal fittings for conduit and

cable penetrations through concrete and masonry wall, floor, slabs, and similar structures.

D. Install sealants and fittings in accordance with all manufacturer's written instructions. 3.12 LABELING:

A. Engraved black plastic laminated, with white-core labels, 1/16" thick, shall be permanently attached on both the interior and exterior the following electrical equipment:

1. Branch panels 2. Switchgear 3. Disconnect switches 4. Motor starter and controls junction boxes (power and auxiliary) 5. Push buttons 6. Thermal switches 7. Time switches 8. Motor control centers 9. Transformer


10. Similar equipment. 11. Lighting contactors and associated switches 12. Junction boxes larger than 4x4x1/2.

B. The labels shall have 1/4" high, engraved letters, such as EF-1, AC-1, Panel A, etc.

C. Label for motor starters and/or thermal overload switches shall include heater size and F.L.A.

D. Labels shall be red where serving emergency loads.

3.13 CONCRETE BASES:

A. Housekeeping Pads: Unless otherwise noted, provide 4" high reinforced concrete bases for all floor-mounted or floor-standing electrical equipment, including but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Transformers 2. Switchgear 3. Motor control centers 4. Generators 5. Battery racks 6. Similar Equipment

B. Extend bases 6" beyond equipment or mounting rails on all sides or as shown on the drawings. Not

withstanding this requirement, coordinate with equipment manufacturer, shop drawings, and height of base to ensure compliance with NEC 380-82.

C. Concrete bases: Refer to Section 260551 – exterior area lighting.

D. Transformer Pads: Provide and locate properly sized concrete pads for power company furnished pad

mounted transformers in accordance with power company clearance requirements. 3.14 TESTS:

A. Notify engineer prior to all testing specified herein at least three business days prior to testing. Engineer shall observe all tests to insure the proper operation of the electrical system.

3.15 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP:

A. Upon completion of the work, have each factory representative and/or subcontractor assist in start-up and testing of their respective systems.

B. Have each representative give personal instructions on operating and maintenance of their equipment to

the owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel.

C. Have representatives certify each system with a written statement indicating that they have performed start-up and final check out of their respective systems.

3.16 FINAL REVIEW:

A. Have the project foreman accompany their reviewing parties and remove coverplates, panel covers, access panels, etc. as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical system.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 260070 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260070 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and 28

sections making reference to electrical connections. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment include all final electrical connections for all equipment having electrical requirements including, but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Equipment specified under all divisions of the contract. Refer to other divisions for specific

electrical requirements. 2. Owner-furnished equipment 3. Kitchen Equipment 4. Etc.


A. STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Not required. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:

A. Provide all materials for electrical connections including, but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Raceways 2. Fittings 3. Conductors 4. Cords 5. Cord caps 6. Wiring devices 7. Pressure connectors 8. Lugs (CU-AL) 9. Electrical insulating tape 10. Heat-shrinkable tubing 11. Cable ties 12. Wire nuts 13. Other items and accessories as required.

B. Crimp on or slip-on type splicing materials designed to be used without wire stripping are not acceptable.

C. Power Distribution Blocks: Provide Square D Type LB or Equivalent.

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 260070 – 2 Bid Documents

D. Refer to other Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections for specification of electrical materials as applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL:

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 CONNECTIONS:

A. Permanently Installed Fixed Equipment:

1. Install conductors in flexible conduit from junction box to equipment control panel or connection point.

2. Where such installations are subject to moisture, install in liquid-tight flexible conduit.

B. Movable equipment:

1. Provide wiring devices, cord caps, and multi-conductor cables as required.

C. Other methods as required by the NEC and/or as required by special equipment or field conditions.

D. Power Distribution Blocks: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, provide power distribution blocks only for tapping of feeders and branch circuits. Locate in junction box or gutter in NEMA ratings to suit application.

3.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:

A. Obtain manufacturer's instruction and wiring diagram regarding electrical connections of each piece of equipment and provide connections in accordance therewith.

3.4 VERIFICATION OF LOAD CHARACTERISTICS:

A. Verify electrical load characteristics of all equipment prior to rough-in. Review respective shop drawings of all other Divisions and Owner's equipment manuals. Report any variances from electrical characteristics noted in the contract documents to the Architect/Engineer prior to rough-in.

B. Value of rough-in work, electrical equipment, etc. installed and/or purchased by the contractor not

meeting equipment requirements shall be credited back to the owner. END OF SECTION 260070

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS 260072 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260072 - ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY: A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems. 3. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS: A. IBC: International Building Code. B. Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an anchor bolt

or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item during a seismic event.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type

and size of electrical support and seismic-restraint component used.

1. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:

1. Fabricated Supports: Representations of field-fabricated supports not detailed on Drawings. 2. Seismic Restraints: Detail anchorage and bracing not defined by details or charts on Drawings.

Include the following: a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include

calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Detail fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the

restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other


systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. D. Welding certificates.

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more

stringent. B. Testing of Seismic Anchorage Devices: Comply with testing requirements in Part 3.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -

Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product

selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS:

A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or

imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. i. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Finishes: a. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-

3. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces.


C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types

and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and

bars; black and galvanized.

G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Verify suitability of fasteners in subparagraph below for use in lightweight concrete or concrete

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete,

steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.

3. In the following subparagraph, use stainless steel anchors in corrosive environments. 4. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers:

1) Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners.

5. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

6. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 7. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 8. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS: A. Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined in reports

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components used shall be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

B. Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system components;


with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. C. Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel thimbles,

brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service.

1. Available Manufacturers: a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. b. Loos & Co., Inc. c. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support, Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces.

3. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod, of design recognized by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.

5. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

2.4 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES:

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of

supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and

plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems,

except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for raceways

as within 12 inches of coupling, fitting, and box, at each 90 degrees bend, minimum of two supports per ten foot run. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system,

sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps, or as otherwise

required by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3.2 SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION: A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, raceways may be supported by


openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service providing required submittals for component.

D. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components

so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

E. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical

items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers

and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

F. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. G. Do not drill or core cut holes for anchors or use powder-activated fasteners in post-tension slabs, joists,

and beams. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS:

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated

metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to

support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES:

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written

instructions and seismic criteria at Project. B. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from


edge of the base.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of the base.

2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 5. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,

reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS:

A. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient

media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient

media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.

D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and

inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing: Test pullout resistance of seismic anchorage devices.

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained

component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect. 5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.

C. Record test results.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah CONDUIT RACEWAYS 260110 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260110 - CONDUIT RACEWAYS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to conduit raceways. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of raceways in this section include the followings:

1. Rigid Metal Conduit 2. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing 5. Flexible Metal Conduit 6. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit 7. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit 8. Electrical Non-metallic Tubing


A. Standards: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable. Provide conduit raceway installation in accordance with recommendations of the American Iron and Steel Institute "Design Manual on Steel Electrical Raceways", latest edition.

B. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of raceway of types and sizes required,

whose products have been in satisfactory service for not less than three (3) years.

C. Shop Drawings: Not required. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS:

A. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): Provide zinc-coated, hot-dipped galvanized, rigid metallic conduit in accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1.

B. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Metal Conduit: Provide hot-dipped galvanized, rigid metallic conduit

externally coated with Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) in accordance with ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Std. Pub. No. RN 1.


C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Provide hot-dipped galvanized, intermediate metal conduit in accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-581.

D. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide electric metal tubing in accordance with Federal Specification

WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide zinc-coated, flexible metal conduit in accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-566.

F. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit, constructed of single

strip, flexible continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside, coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).

G. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Provide rigid non-metallic conduit (PVC) in accordance with ANSI/NEMA

TC 2, Type 1 for concrete encasement, Type 2 for direct burial. 2.2 FITTINGS:

A. Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, and PVC Externally Coated Rigid Metal Conduit: Provide fully-threaded, malleable steel fittings, rain-tight and concrete-tight as applicable. Provide double locknuts and metal bushings at all conduit terminations. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1-1/4" and larger.

B. Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide insulated throat, non-indenter, set screw, malleable steel fittings.

Screws must have a full set. Provide concrete-tight compression-type fittings in suspended slabs. All EMT fittings shall be fabricated from steel. Die-cast fittings or fittings made from pot metal shall not be allowed. Indenter type fittings are not acceptable. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1" and larger.

C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide flexible metal conduit fittings in accordance with Federal Specification

W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. Commercial "greenfield" not less than 1/2" diameter or as otherwise specified on drawings is acceptable.

D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings in accordance

with Federal Specification W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G.

E. Non-Metallic Conduit: Provide non-metallic conduit fittings (PVC) in accordance with ANSI/NEMA TC 3 to match conduit types and materials.

F. Expansion Fittings: OZ Type AX, or equivalent to suit application.

G. Sealing Bushings: Provide OZ Type FSK, WSK, or CSMI as required by application. Provide OZ Type

CSB internal sealing bushings.

H. Cable Supports: Provide OZ cable supports for vertical risers, type as required by application. 2.3 SIZES:

A. Provide conduits in sizes as indicated in contract documents or as otherwise specified herein, but not less than 1/2".

PART 3 – EXECUTION


3.1 GENERAL:

A. Install raceway and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 LOCATIONS:

A. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for conduit bends greater than 22 degrees where buried below grade or slab on grade. Install RMC where raceway passes vertically through slab-on-grade. Where raceways penetrate building, manholes, or vault walls and floors below grade, provide RMC for a minimum distance of 10' on the exterior side of the floor or wall. Use RMC for exposed runs where conduit is subject to moisture, weather, or mechanical injury. Use in hazardous locations in accordance with all NEC requirements.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for exposed runs where conduit is subject to moisture,

weather, or mechanical injury. Use in hazardous locations in accordance with all NEC requirements.

C. Electric Metal Tubing and Fittings: Use for above-grade feeders, branch circuit home runs, and signal and control circuit, unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings. Install in suspended slabs subject to local code requirements and fire rating considerations.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use as whips for lighting fixtures, fixed equipment where not

exposed to weather of moisture, other devices where required by NEC, and as requested by the Engineer. Maximum length not to exceed 6', unless specifically approved by the Electrical Engineer.

E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for connection to motor terminal boxes, fixed

equipment where subject to moisture or weather, and other equipment subject to movement or vibration. Maximum length not to exceed 6', unless specified otherwise.

F. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit and Fittings: Use for below-grade service entrances, feeders, branch

circuits, and signal and control circuit, unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings. Do not use above grade.

3.3 METHODS:

A. Maintain a minimum of 12" clearance between steam or hot water lines or other hot surfaces. Where such clearance is impractical, insulate conduit with approved materials.

B. Install conduits parallel with or at right angles to lines of the structure. Route conduits symmetrically

where possible.

C. Field bends and offsets shall be made without flattening, kinking, rippling or destroying the smooth internal bore or surface of the conduit and to not less than NEC minimum radius. Conduit that shows signs of rippling or kinking shall not be installed. Conduits installed with wrinkles or kinks or otherwise in an un-workmanlike manner shall be replaced at no additional cost to owner.

D. Precaution shall be exercised to prevent accumulation of water, dirt or concrete in the conduits during the

execution of the project. Conduits in which water or foreign matter has been permitted to accumulate shall be thoroughly cleaned or the conduits runs replaced where such accumulation cannot be removed by methods approved the engineer.


E. Any conduit which pierces airtight spaces or plenums shall be sealed to prevent air leakage with mastic acceptable to the Architect.

3.4 CONCEALING:

A. All raceways shall be concealed within the ceilings, walls, and floors, except in locations where exposed raceways are specifically permitted, such as equipment rooms and unfinished storage areas. In equipment rooms, if lighting raceways are run exposed, installation shall not be done until piping and duct work layout has been determined in order that lighting boxes may be located so as to avoid being covered by overhead ducts and piping. If lighting raceways in equipment rooms are concealed in the structural ceiling slab, after mechanical work is complete, exposed conduit extensions shall be run to locate lighting fixtures where they are not obscured by work of other trades.

3.5 BURIED CONDUITS:

A. Comply with all burial depths as defined in NEC Section 300-5. Bury all conduits at least 24" below grade, unless specifically indicated otherwise on drawings. Provide magnetic 6" wide “Yellow Warning" ribbon 12" directly above conduit and 6" below finished grade measured from the top of the conduit or duct bank. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single marker.

B. Slope all conduits toward manholes or pull boxes for proper drainage. Use weep holes. Gravel drainage

pockets are not permitted.

C. Coat all metal conduits with an approved asphaltic compound or wrap with two layers of PVC tape.

D. Under Concrete Slab on Grade: Horizontal conduit must be installed a minimum of 2” below the bottom of the concrete slab. Conduits should not be installed in concrete slabs.

E. Concrete Encasement: Where concrete-encasement is indicated on drawings, provide ductbank

construction using red 3000 psi at 28 day strength concrete. Provide minimum 4" cover on all sides of exterior conduits. Provide conduit spacers where applicable. Coat all metal conduits with an approved asphaltic compound or wrap with two layers of PVC tape.

F. Where conduits are extended for future use, cap and clearly mark.

3.6 ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY:

A. Provide electrically continuous conduit systems throughout.

3.7 FIELD CUTS AND THREADS:

A. Cut all conduits square. Remove all sharp or rough edges and ream all burrs, inside and outside. Provide clean sharp threads on RMC and IMC.

B. Engage at least five full threads on all RMC and IMC fittings. Before couplings or fittings are attached,

apply one coat of red lead or zinc chromate to male threads of RMC or IMC. Apply coat of red lead, zinc chromate or special compound recommended by manufacture to conduit where conduit protective coating is damaged.

3.8 SUSPENDED SLABS:

A. When conduit is installed in the suspended slab, it shall be limited to conduits having a diameter of 1" (25


mm) or less, or less than 1/3 the concrete cover, and no crossovers occur, and conduit spaced at least 18" (450 mm) apart with a 3/4" (20 mm) cover.

3.9 CONDUIT ENDS:

A. Cap all spare conduits. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of foreign material.

3.10 SPARE CONDUITS:

A. Provide five (5) 3/4" empty conduits from panel stubbed into accessible ceiling space and five (5) 3/4" conduits into accessible floor space. When floor is not accessible, provide six (6) 3/4" empty conduits from panel stubbed into accessible ceiling space. Cap and label all conduits.

B. Install a 200 lb. polypropylene pull cord in each empty conduit run.

3.11 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:

A. Install RMC and IMC in all hazardous locations as defined by the NEC. Provide suitable fittings, seal-offs, boxes, etc. to comply with all NEC requirements and/or as shown on the drawings. Provide inspection fittings with hazardous location rated drains to prevent water from accumulating in conduit runs.

3.12 CLEANING:

A. Pull mandril and swab through all conduits before installing conductors. END OF SECTION 260110

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah CONDUCTORS & CABLES 260120 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A . Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

B . This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and 28

sections making reference to conductors and cables. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A . This section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

B . Types of conductors and cables in this section include the following:

1. Copper Conductors. 2. MC Flexible Metal Clad Copper Cables. 3. MC Jacketed Flexible Metal Clad Copper Cables

C . Applications for conductors and cables required for project include:

1. Electrical service. 2. Feeders. 3. Branch Circuits.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A . Product Data: For each type of conductor and/or cable indicated.

B . Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. Refer to Section 260001 – General Electrical Provisions.


A . Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B . Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A . Manufacturers: In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, provide products by the manufacturer specified, subject to compliance with requirements.


B . Ambient Conditions: Conductors used for branch circuits in areas where the ambient conditions exceed 30 degree C. shall be provided with insulation approved for that temperature.

C . Wire Sizes: As indicated on electrical drawings or as specified herein, but in no case less than No. 12

AWG. 2.2 COPPER CONDUCTORS:

A . Manufacturers:

1. American Insulated Wire Corporation; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company.

B . Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.

C . References and Ratings:

1. ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC70. 2. ASTM. 3. UL Standard 83. 4. UL Standard 1063 (MTW). 5. Federal Specification J-C-30B. 6. NEC.

D . Conductor Material: Copper.

E . Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 12 AWG, stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.

F . Conductor Insulation Types: Thermoplastic-insulated, Type THHN / THWN-2.

2.3 MC FLEXIBLE METAL CLAD COPPER CABLES:

A . Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B . Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.

C . References and Ratings:

1. UL 83, 1479, 1569, 1581, File Reference E80042. 2. NEC 230-43, 300-22(c), 318, 321, 334, 518, 520, 530, 645. 3. Federal Specifications J-C-30B. 4. Meets all applicable OSHA and HUD requirements. 5. May be surface-mounted or embedded in plaster. 6. UL rated for Cable Tray and Environmental Air-Handling Space installation; 1, 2 and 3-hour

through-penetration Fire Wall rated.

D . Conductor Material: Copper.

E . Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.


F . Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN.

G . Armor: Galvanized steel.

H . Assembly Covering: Mylar Tape.

I . Grounding: Insulated green grounding conductor. 2.4 MC JACKETED FLEXIBLE METAL CLAD COPPER CABLES

A . Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B . Refer to Part 3 “Conductor and Cable Applications” Article for application requirements. C . References and ratings:

1. UL 62, 83, 1569, 1581, File Reference E80042. 2. NEC 230-43, 318, 321-3(a), 334, 501, 502, 503, 511-6, 513-4(a), 514-4, 515-4, 516-7(a), 680-

25(c). 3. Federal Specification J-C-30B. 4. Passes UL 210,000 BTU Vertical Tray Flame Test. 5. UL Cable Tray rated. 6. UL rated for DIRECT BURIAL in earth or concrete. 7. UL rated for Sunlight Resistant. 8. UL rated for Oil Resistant.

D . Conductor Material: Copper. E . Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. F . Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN/THWN. G . Armor: Galvanized steel with gray PVC jacket. H . Assembly Covering: Mylar Tape. I . Grounding: Insulated green grounding conductor.

2.5 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES:

A . Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

B . Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class

for application and service indicated. C . Splices for wire sizes #10 and smaller shall be screw-on type similar to scotch or ideal wing nut


connectors. Crimp-on splices designed to be used without wire stripping are not acceptable. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL:

A. Install conductors, cables, and accessories as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS:

A. Service Entrance: As indicated on the electrical drawings.

B. Feeders: As indicated on the electrical drawings.

C. Branch Circuits:

1. Exposed, including in crawlspaces: Copper conductors in conduit. 2. Concealed in walls: MC Cable or Copper conductors in conduit. 3. Lighting and power circuit homeruns: Copper conductors in conduit. 4. Lighting circuits in exposed areas: Copper conductors in conduit. 5. Concealed in accessible ceilings for lighting: MC Cable.

D. Cord Drops, Reels, and Portable Appliance Connections: Flexible cord.

E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Copper conductors in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Conceal cables and conduit in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not

damage cables or raceway.

D. When raceway is not required, install concealed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to other applicable specification sections.

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements to comply with applicable fire stop specification

sections.

G. Color Coding: Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors. Colors shall remain consistent throughout the project and shall match existing coding system where applicable.

1. Conductor sizes No. 6 AWG and smaller: Colored insulation. 2. Conductors sizes No. 4 AWG and larger: 2 inch (51 mm) band of Colored adhesive marking tape


applied at all terminations, junction boxes, and pull boxes. 3. Branch circuit switched-legs and travelers: Colored insulation (in colors other than those indicated

below). 4. Color-code 120/208V system conductors:

a) Phase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. c) Phase C: Blue. d) Neutral: White. e) Ground: Green. f) Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer.

5. Color-code 277/480V system conductors: a) Phase A: Brown. b) Phase B: Orange. c) Phase C: Yellow. d) Neutral: White with colored stripe or gray. e) Ground: Green.

6. Color-code 120/240V system conductors: a) Phase A: Black. b) Phase B: Red. c) Neutral: White. d) Ground: Green. e) Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer.

3.4 HOMERUN CIRCUITS:

A. Homerun circuits may be combined in common conduits at the option of the contractor in compliance with the following:

1. Three-Phase Installations: Not more than three single-phase circuits with dedicated neutrals in

one conduit, unless specifically noted otherwise, if each circuit is from a different phase (a, b, or c).

2. Single-Phase Installations: Not more than two single-phase circuits with dedicated neutrals in one conduit, unless specifically noted otherwise, if each circuit is from a different phase (a or b).

3.5 NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS:

A. LIGHTING CIRCUITS: Where multiple circuits serving lighting are run in a single raceway (see paragraph above for allowable number or circuits per conduit), a separate neutral shall be included for each circuit. In each outlet or junction box containing multiple neutrals, each neutral shall be tagged to identify which circuit it serves.

B. OUTLET CIRCUITS: Where multiple circuits serving electrical outlets are run in a single raceway (see paragraph above for allowable number of circuits per conduit), a separate neutral shall be included for each circuit. In each outlet or junction box containing multiple neutrals, each neutral shall be tagged to identify which circuit it serves.

3.6 SYSTEM FURNITURE CIRCUITS:

A. Coordinate system furniture wiring requirements and termination locations with supplier/installer prior to rough-in. Coordinate placement of connection boxes in walls and columns (where applicable) to insure that adequate accessibility is maintained.

B. 4-Circuit, 3+D Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture connection consisting of

three circuits with shared equipment ground and shared oversized neutral; and one dedicated circuit with


dedicated isolated ground and dedicated neutral. Size the shared neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase conductor. For systems furniture circuits, provide a multi-pole breaker to comply with NEC 210.4 for shared neutrals.

C. 4-Circuit, 2+2 Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture connection consisting of

two circuits with shared equipment ground and shared oversized neutral; and two circuit with shared isolated ground and shared oversized neutral. Size the shared neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase conductor. For systems furniture circuits, provide a multi-pole breaker to comply with NEC 210.4 for shared neutrals.

3.7 VOLTAGE DROP:

A. Provide branch circuit conductors in sizes such that voltage drop for branch circuits do not exceed 3 percent at the farthest outlet. Provide service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors so that the voltage drop on the entire electrical system does not exceed 5 percent at the farthest outlet. This shall be strictly followed regardless of the conductor sizes indicated on the electrical drawings. Increase conductor sizes (and conduits where necessary to comply with NEC conduit fill requirements) as necessary to accommodate this requirement. Calculations shall be based on the following:

1. Lighting Branch Circuits: Connected load plus 25% spare. 2. Appliance and Equipment Branch Circuits: Nameplate or NEC required load. 3. 120V Convenience Outlet Branch Circuits: 12 amps minimum, but in no case less than NEC

loading requirements. Use the following schedule: Distance (feet) Wire Size (AWG)

0-80 #12 81-125 #10 126-200 #8 201-320 #6

4. Use the NEC method to calculate voltage drop.

3.8 CONNECTIONS:

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better

mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. Use pig tails when wiring outlets.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: a) Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with the electrical

construction documents. b) Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer’s recommended values with a

calibrated torque wrench. c) Check cable color coding for compliance with electrical specifications.


2. Electrical Tests: a) Perform insulation resistance test on each conductors for feeders 100 amps and greater with

respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for 1 minute.

b) Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection. 3. Test Values:

a) Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than two megohms.

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report and submit to the Electrical Engineer at the completion of the project. The report shall include the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 260120

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah ELECTRICAL BOXES & FITTINGS 260135 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260135 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to electrical boxes and fittings. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A . Extent of electrical boxes and fittings work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B . Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:

1. Outlet Boxes 2. Junction Boxes 3. Pull Boxes 4. Floor Boxes 5. Conduit Bodies 6. Bushings 7. Locknuts 8. Knockout Closures 9. Miscellaneous Boxes and Fittings


A . Standards: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable.

B . Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of boxes and fittings required, whose products have been in satisfactory service for not less than three years.

C . Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings on floor boxes only where required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES:

A . General: Provide one piece, galvanized or cadmium-plated, flat-rolled, sheet steel interior outlet boxes of types, shapes, and sizes to suit respective location and installation. Construct with stamped knockouts on back and sides and with threaded screw holes. Provide corrosion-resistant screws for securing boxes, covers, and wiring devices. Size all junction boxes in accordance with NEC Table 314.16(A), with a minimum box size of 4" x 4" x 1-1/2". Where three raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". Where four or more raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 4-11/16". Gangable boxes shall not be used.

B . Switch, Telephone, and Receptacle Outlets: Provide outlet boxes not less than 4" square, with adapting

tile or plaster covers where necessary to set flush with finished surfaces. Where three raceway entries


are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". Gang boxes shall be used where more than one switch or device is located at one point. Sectional Boxes are not acceptable. In masonry walls where tile or plaster ring cannot be used, install a single-gang 3-1/2" deep box minimum, unless otherwise noted. Where four or more raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 4-11/16".

C . Lighting Outlets:

1. Lay-in Grid: Outlets for recessed fixtures in acoustical tile ceilings shall be located to center on a

single tile or at the intersection of four tiles. 2. Surface-mounted: Provide 4" square octagonal outlet boxes for surface-mounted, ceiling fixture

outlets. Mount each box independently of the conduit on standard 3/8" stud or approved box hangar where applicable. Include backing and supports as required to carry 200 lbs. Where three or more raceway entrances are made, use a minimum box depth of 2-1/8".

2.2 WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES:

A . Provide corrosion-resistant, cast-metal weatherproof outlet boxes, of types, shapes, and sizes, with threaded conduit ends, cast metal coverplates with spring-hinged waterproof caps, face plate gaskets, and corrosion-resistant fasteners.

2.3 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:

A . Provide code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with removable screw-on covers and welded seams, of types, shapes, and sizes to suit each respective location and installation. Size all junction and pull boxes in accordance with NEC 314.28. Provide stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washer.

2.4 FLOOR BOXES:

A . Provide steel or PVC, weatherproof, concrete-tight floor boxes of types, shapes, and sizes to suit each respective location and installation. Where multi-service floor boxes are indicated, provide floor boxes sized to accommodate wiring devices and communication outlets shown on drawings. Construct floor boxes with fully adjustable leveling screws, and knockouts as required to accommodate specified conduits.

B . Provide floor boxes from the following manufacturers:

1. Bell Electric 2. Crouse-Hinds 3. Hubbell 4. Steel City 5. Thomas&Betts 6. Wiremold

2.5 CONDUIT BODIES:

A . Provide galvanized, cast-metal conduit bodies of type, shapes, and sizes to suit respective locations and installation. Construct with threaded conduit entrance ends and removable covers. Provide corrosion-resistant screws.

B . Aluminum boxes and fitting shall not be permitted.

2.6 CONDUIT CONNECTIONS:


A . Box connectors 3/4" and larger shall be insulated, throat-type or equal type plastic bushings. Provide double locknuts and insulating plastic bushings for RMC and IMC terminating at panels and boxes.

B . Where RMC penetrates building, manholes, or vault walls and floors below grade, provide sealing

bushings with external membrane clamps as applicable. Provide segmented internal sealing bushings in all raceways penetrating building walls and slabs below grade, and in all above grade raceway penetrations susceptible to moisture migration into building through raceway. Where RMC terminates in manhole, vault, or pull box, provide insulated grounding bushings. Also see Section 260135 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings.

C . Install OZ type "B" connectors for all conduits 1" and larger.

D . Provide cable supports in all vertical risers in accordance with NEC 300-19.

2.7 EXPANSION FITTINGS:

A . Provide expansion joint fittings in all conduit runs crossing structural expansion joints, whether above-grade, in slab-on-grade, or in suspended slabs. Provide OZ type "AX" or approved equivalent, size to the raceway.

2.8 ACCESSORIES:

A . Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, bushings, knockout closures, locknuts, offset connectors, etc. of types, shapes, and sizes to suit respective locations and installation. Construct of corrosion-resistant steel.


A. Install electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 METHODS:

A. Where outlet boxes are subject to weather or moisture, install weatherproof outlet boxes.

B. Remove knockouts only for entering conduits. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks are mistakenly removed.

C. Do not use condulets in place of elbows or junction boxes. Condulets in sizes 2" or larger shall not be

used, unless specifically approved by the electrical engineer.

D. Install boxes and conduit bodies in readily accessible locations. Install recessed boxes with faces of boxes or rings flush with finished surfaces. Seal all openings between outlet box and adjacent surfaces with plaster, grout, or similar suitable material.

E. For stud construction, install boxes with rigid supports using metal bar hangers, or 2" X 4", 1" X 6" wood

bridging between studs with screws. Welding or nailing boxes directly to metal joist and studs is not acceptable. Boxes set opposite in common wall shall have at least 10" of conduit between them. Securely fasten outlet boxes to structural surfaces to which attached.


F. For concrete or masonry construction, solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete and masonry. Provide box supports as required to keep outlet boxes flush with finished surfaces.

G. Coordinate location of all outlet boxes with millwork, back splashes, tackboards, etc.

H. Install junction boxes or condulets in conduit runs as required at 100 foot maximum intervals on long

runs. This shall apply to concrete junction boxes in grade and junction boxes within the building.

I. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Mark circuit number on exterior side of junction boxes located in ceilings such that circuits numbers are readily identifiable. For outlet boxes in wall, mark circuit numbers on interior sides of outlet boxes.

B. Identification labels shall be as follows:

Normal Power Black with White letters Emergency Power Red with White Letters UPS Orange with White Letters


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah WIRING DEVICES 260140 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to wiring devices. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A . Extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B . Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:

1. Toggle Switches 2. Receptacles 3. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) Receptacles 4. Floor Service Outlets 5. Poke-Through Assemblies 6. Dimmers 7. Special Purpose Outlets 8. Multioutlet Assemblies 9. Cord Caps and Connectors 10. Occupancy Sensors


A . STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable.

B . SHOP DRAWINGS:

1. Submit manufacturer's data on all electrical wiring devices. 2. Where occupancy sensors are required, provide scaled drawing showing manufacturer’s

recommended locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:

A . Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, and electrical ratings for applications indicated and complying with NEMA standards Pub No. WD 1. nylon construction, 20 amp rating minimum.

B . Provide wiring devices in colors selected by Architect/Engineer. Provide red receptacle outlets and

toggle switches where devices are circuited to emergency power. Provide orange receptacle outlets where devices are circuited to UPS power.


2.2 SWITCHES (FED-SPEC ECONOMY):

A . Provide toggle switched from one of the following manufacturers (Fed-Spec (Economy)):

Manufacturer 1-Pole 3-Way 4-Way W/Pilot

Hubbell CS1221 CS1223 CS1224 CS-1221-PL Leviton 1221-S 1222-S 1223-S 1221-PLR Cooper CS1221 CS1223 CS1224 CS1221PL

2.3 RECEPTACLES (FED-SPEC ECONOMY):

A . Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:

Manufacturer CO GCFI IG

Hubbell CR5362 GF6362 CR5362IG Leviton 5362-S 8899 5362-IG Cooper CR5362 VGF15 IG5362

B . Abbreviations are defined as follows:

1. CO -Convenience Outlet Duplex Receptacle 2. GCFI-Ground Fault Interrupter Duplex Receptacle 3. G-Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle

2.4 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) RECEPTACLES:

A . Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:

Manufacturer SS IGSS

Hubbell HBL5362SA IG5362SA Pass & Seymour 6362-SP IG 6362-SP Leviton 8380 8380IG Cooper S3624 IG53625 Bryant SP53LIA SP53TIGA

B . Abbreviations are defined as follows:

1. SS - Duplex Receptacle with Surge Suppression, visual/audible 2. IGSS - Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle with Surge Suppression, visual/audible

2.5 FLOOR SERVICE OUTLETS:

A . Provide all receptacles and special purpose outlets required in floor boxes. See Section 260135 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings. Provide coverplates, carpet flanges, etc. in finishes or colors selected by Architect/Engineer.

2.6 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES:

A . Provide factory-assembled, poke-through assemblies equipped with wiring devices as specified herein.


Construct of materials to maintain fire rating of suspended slab with pre-wired conduit, fire barriers, toggle arm assemblies, service fittings, integral junction box, etc. Provide coverplates, carpet flanges, etc. in finishes or colors selected by Architect/Engineer. Provide Poke-through assemblies of one of the following:

1. Hubbell 2. Thomas&Betts 3. Wiremold

2.7 DIMMERS:

A . Incandescent: Provide solid state, linear slide preset dimmers of voltage and wattage ratings to suit respective application. Provide dimmers that are UL listed for required loads (i.e., incandescent, magnetic low voltage transformer, electronic low voltage transformer). Where applicable, insure that dimmers are compatible with lamps and ballasts provided. Provide dimmers from one of the following:

1. Lutron (Nova T Series) 2. Prescolite (Horizon Series) 3. Lightolier (Neptune Momentum Series) 4. Leviton (IllumaTech Series)

B . Fluorescent: Provide single-pole, AC dimmers for fluorescent fixtures, 60 hertz, 120 or 277 volt as

applicable, with slide-to-off continuously adjustable slider control. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low end dimming. Dimmers to be an integral part of a fluorescent dimming system consisting of dimming ballast and lighting controls made by the same manufacturer. Refer to Section 260510 - Interior and Exterior Building Lighting. Provide dimmers from one of the following:

1. Lutron (Nova T Series) 2. Leviton (IllumaTech Series)

2.8 SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLETS:

A . Provide special purpose outlets of voltage and ampere ratings, and NEMA configurations to suit respective application. Refer to drawings for NEMA configuration. Provide special purpose outlets in amperages at least as large as the overcurrent protective device from which they are served.

2.9 MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES:

A . Provide multi-outlet assemblies with 15A, grounding-type, receptacle outlets spaced at 6" on centers and in colors selected by Architect/Engineer or as otherwise noted on drawings. Provide multi-outlet assemblies of one of the following:

1. Wiremold 2. Thomas&Betts 3. Hubbell

2.10 CORD CAPS AND CONNECTORS:

A . Provide cord caps and connectors of voltage and ampere ratings, and NEMA configurations which mate and match with outlets specified as required for final connections for equipment. Provide cord caps and connectors of one of the following:


1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Leviton 4. Cooper 5. Bryant

2.11 COVERPLATES:

A . Wall Plates: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices. In all finished areas, provide nylon or high impact resistant thermoplastic coverplates in colors as selected by Architect. Provide red coverplates for all receptacle outlets and toggle switches that are circuited to emergency power. Provide orange coverplates for all isolated ground receptacle outlets. Provide stainless steel coverplates in commercial kitchens and food preparation areas. Provide ganged coverplates for all switches and/or dimmers. Provide pre-marked coverplates for special purpose outlet indicating voltage, amperages, and phase. Provide raised stamped, galvanized, steel plates in all unfinished areas. Provide weather-proof coverplates for outlets exposed to weather and moisture.

B . Weather-Protecting Device Enclosure: Where required for compliance with NEC 410-67 (receptacles

installed outdoors for use other than with portable tools or equipment), provide weather-tight device covers which provide complete protection with the cord and cap inserted into the wring device. Provide units which mount on either single or double gang devices. Provide device enclosures manufactured by one of the following:

1. Intermatic WP1020 or WP1030 2. Hubbell WP826MP 3. Pass & Seymore

2.12 OCCUPANCY SENSORS:

A . General: Provide self-contained, ultrasonic motion detectors providing volumetric coverage without gaps within the detection area. Provide sensors in voltage and wattage ratings required to suit application. Provide sensors from one of the following manufacturers:

1. Lithonia 2. Novitas 3. The Watt Stopper 4. Hubbell 5. Leviton

B . Ceilings-Type Occupancy Sensors :

1. One-way Sensors: Pattern shall cover 900 sq. ft minimum of ½ step motion and 670 sq. ft

minimum working-at-desk motion. 2. Two-way Sensors: Pattern shall cover 1,800 sq. ft. minimum of ½ step motion and 1,344 sq. ft

minimum working-at-desk motion. 3. Corridor and Warehouse Sensors: Sensors shall detect motion in a corridor 14' wide and 80' long,

with one sensor mounted 10' above the floor. Sensors shall detect motion in a warehouse aisle 10' wide and 60' long (walking motion) or 100' long (forklift motion ) when mounted 22 feet above the floor.

4. Sensors shall contain timing circuiting to provide user adjustable "time to light off" delay of 30 seconds to 12 minutes.

5. A manual override switch in the sensor shall allow the load to be turned on without tools in the event of sensor failure.


6. Switchpack: Provide switchpack for 15 VDC power to sensors for relay switching of load. Relay contact shall be isolated and shall be operable on either 120 or 277 VAC circuits. Relay contacts shall have ratings as follows: a. 10A - 120 VAC Tungsten b. 20A - 120 VAC Ballast c. 20A - 277 VAC Ballast

7. Provide device with a spare relay for HVAC control where indicated on drawings.

C . Wall-Type Occupancy Sensors:

1. The wall switch shall be designed to cover areas up to 300 sq. ft. in one direction. 2. The unit shall require a pushbutton to be pressed to turn lights on. Lights may also be turned off

with the same pushbutton, or lights shall automatically be turned off after the pre-set period of time elapses.

3. There shall be a 10 second "grace" period after the unit turns itself off (because of lack of motion) during which a new motion will automatically turn light on without the pushbutton having to be pressed.

4. Sensitivity and time-on after activation shall be user adjustable through concealed controls to minimize tampering. Time-on shall be adjustable between 90 seconds and 30 minutes.

5. Override capability, for use in emergency or during lamp changes, shall be provided by a three-position switch which allows selection of positive on, off, and automatic operation.

6. Provide device with a spare relay for HVAC control where indicated on drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL:

A. Install wiring devices and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to insure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 METHODS:

A. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building materials, dirt, and debris. Do not install wiring devices until painting work is completed.

B. Replace receptacles and/or coverplates which are damaged, stained, or burned.

3.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES:

A. Provide separate neutral conductor from panel to each GFCI receptacle circuits.

B. Install GFCI receptacles for all receptacles installed in restrooms, outdoors, or within six feet of any sink. All receptacles in kitchens shall be GCFI protected.

C. Do not wire standard receptacles on the load side of GFCI receptacle - Install GFCI receptacles.

3.4 DIMMERS:

A. Provide separate neutral conductor for each phase of the branch circuit on which dimmers are installed.


B. Provide dimmers in wattage ratings that will support the maximum potential wattage of the fixtures that are being dimmed. Do not size dimmers based on actual lamps installed in light fixtures, but on maximum lamp wattage ratings of light fixtures on that particular circuit.

3.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS:

A. Provide all receptacles and special purpose outlets required in surface raceways. See Sections 260110 – Conduit Raceways, and 260135 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings.

3.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS:

A. Do not locate immediately adjacent to air diffusers. Coordinate exact placement with Divisions 21, 22, and 23.

3.7 GROUNDING:

A. Provide electrical continuous, tight, grounding connections for wiring devices. 3.8 TESTING:

A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION:

A. All devices shall be identified on the coverplate with panelboard name and circuit number. B. In each outlet, tag each wire to identify the circuit it serves.

C. Identification labels shall be as follows:

Normal Power Black with White letters Emergency Power Red with White Letters UPS Orange with White Letters


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah MOTOR STARTERS 260155 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260155 - MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to motor starters. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A . Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B . Type of motor starters in this section include the following:

1. Fractional Horsepower Manual Starters 2. Integral Horsepower Manual Starters 3. Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 4. Two-Speed Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters 5. Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters


A . STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable.

B . SUBMITTALS:

1. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's data and dimensional details on motor starters including voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details.

2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL:

A . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of on of the following:

1. Allen Bradley 2. Cutler-Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 5. Square D


B . Maintenance, Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 3 units of each, for both power and control circuit fuses.

2.2 THERMAL OVERLOAD UNITS:

A . Provide metal alloy, thermal overload units for all motor starters. Size to actual running full load current, not to motor plate current, after air and water balancing are completed.

2.3 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL STARTERS:

A . Provide fractional horsepower manual starters for single-phase fractional horsepower motors up to and including 1 horsepower, equivalent to Square D Class 2510, Type F, of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics required to suit applications or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage starter, with thermal overload units, red pilot light, and toggle operator with handle guard/lock-off. Provide ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosures, or where subject to weather or moisture, Type 3R.

2.4 INTEGRAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL STARTERS:

A . Provide integral horsepower manuals starters for single-phase and three-phase motors in excess of 1 horsepower, equivalent to Square D Class 2510, Type M, of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics required to suit applications or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage starter, with thermal overload units, low voltage protection, red pilot light, and push button with mechanism lock off. Provide ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosures, or where subject to weather or moisture, Type 3R.

2.5 NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS:

A . Provide non-reversing magnetic starters equivalent to Square D Class 8536, Type S, of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics as required to suit applications or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic starter for induction motors. Provide encapsulated coil with operating voltage compatible with control system (coordinate with Divisions 21, 22, and 23). Provide totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium-oxide power contacts. Contact inspection and replacement shall be possible without disturbing line or load wiring. Provide straight-through wiring with all terminals clearly marked. Provide NEMA ICS, melting alloy, interchangeable, overload relays with one-piece thermal unit construction and under voltage protection in all phases. Provide replaceable overload relay control circuit contacts. Thermal units shall be required for starter to operate. Provide NEMA ICS 2, 2 each normally open and closed, field convertible, auxiliary contacts in addition to seal-in contact. Provide rotary-type, hand-off-auto and reset switches, recessed pushbutton control. Provide red pilot light. Provide control power transformer in each motor starter with fused primary and secondary. Provide each magnetic starter with integral phase failure protection that will protect against phase loss, phase unbalance, phase reversal, and undervoltage. Provide ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosures, or where subject to weather or moisture, Type 3R.

2.6 TWO-SPEED NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS:

A . Provide two-speed, non-reversing magnetic starters equivalent to Square D 8810, of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics as required to suit applications or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide non-reversing magnetic starters with features as noted above in the description for "NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS" with the following exceptions: Provide high/low pushbutton switches to select motor speed when operating in the hand mode. Provide green high speed and red low speed pilot lights. Label lights appropriately. Provide separate overload units for high and low speed windings. Provide consequent pole and/or separate winding starters as required to coordinate with motors provided.


Coordinate all work with Divisions 21, 22, and 23. 2.7 COMBINATION NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS:

A . Provide combination, non-reversing magnetic starters equivalent to Square D 8538, Type S (non-fusible and fusible disconnect switch type) and Square D 8539, Type S (motor circuit protector type), of types, sizes, and electrical characteristics as required to suit applications or as otherwise indicated on drawings. Provide non-reversing magnetic starters and/or two-speed non-reversing magnetic starters with features as noted above in the descriptions for "NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS" and "TWO-SPEED NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS".

B . Where Combination Magnetic Starter/Motor Circuit Protector switches are specified, provide NEMA AB

1, circuit breakers with integral instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers with externally operable handles that give positive visual indication of ON-OFF positions with red and black color coding.

C . Where Combination Magnetic Starter/Nonfusible Disconnect Switches are specified, provide NEMA KS

1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle and visible blades. Provide disconnects with externally operable handles that give positive visual indication of ON-OFF positions with red and black color coding.

D . Where Combination Magnetic Starter/Fusible Disconnect Switches are specified, provide NEMA KS 1,

enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle and visible blades. Provide switches with Fuse clips to accommodate Class J fuses. Provide fuses in accordance with Section 260180 - Overcurrent Protective Devices. Provide disconnects with externally operable handles that give positive visual indication of ON-OFF positions with red and black color coding.


A. Install motor starters in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices.

3.2 METHODS:

A. Install overload units so catalog number is visible. Mount chart inside each starter indicating heater type, size, and ampere ratings available.

B. Where sizes of starters, disconnect, fuses, motor circuit protectors, heaters, etc. are not indicated on

drawings, size all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Submit with the record drawings a record of the motor amperage readings of each electrically-driven unit; show horsepower, full-load amps and service factor.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high lettering on the exterior of each starter cabinet. Provide red plastic laminate label for starter supplied by emergency power. Include mechanical equipment designation, horsepower, voltage, full-load amps, and service factor of motor. Mark on


interior cover the source of power by indicating the panel and circuit number. 3.4 MOTOR CONNECTIONS:

A. Each motor shall be connected to the conduit with a length of flexible, seal-tight conduit (minimum of 18"), with proper type fittings. All motor supply circuits shall include a green ground conductor. Check for proper motor rotation on all motors or equipment.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah PANELBOARDS 260160 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260160 – PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to panelboards. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of panelboard work is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein.

B. Type of panelboards in this section include the following:

1. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards 2. Power Distribution Panelboards



B. SUBMITTALS:

1. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layouts of enclosures. Include schedule of devices, including, but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground-fault circuit interrupters, and accessories.

2. Equipment Room Layouts: Submit dimensioned drawings of all equipment rooms indicating spatial relationships to other proximate equipment. Insure that all code required clearances are maintained.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products from one of the follows:

1. Cutler-Hammer, Eaton Corp. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co.

2.2 GENERAL:

A. Provide panelboards, enclosures, and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated. Provide overcurrent protective devices, etc. as indicated on drawings for a complete installation.


B. Where "Spaces" or "Blanks" are indicated on panelboard schedules, provide drilled bus and mounting hardware ready to receive breaker or fusible switch of size indicated on panelboard schedule.

2.3 PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES:

A. Provide Code gauge, galvanized or rust-resistant sheet steel enclosures in sizes and NEMA types to suit respective applications. The size of the wiring gutters and gauge of steel shall be in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards Publication and latest UL standards for panelboards. Flush locks shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. Key all enclosures alike and provide three keys at completion of the project. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps, which shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. A circuit directory frame and card, with clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The directory cards shall be typewritten to identify each circuit service. Provide panel enclosures with doors hinged to enclosures. Provide ANSI-61 painted finish.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS:

A. Provide dead-front, safety-type lighting and appliance panelboards of types and electrical characteristic indicated. Provide copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bus, and ground bus. Provide insulated/isolated ground buses where indicated. Include overcurrent protective devices and switches in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown. See Section 260180 - Overcurrent Protective Devices.

B. Rate devices, bussing, supports, etc. equal to or greater than the short circuit current rating indicated.

Provide fully-rated systems only. Series-rated systems are not acceptable, unless specifically noted otherwise.

2.5 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS:

A. Provide dead-front, safety-type lighting and appliance panelboards of types and electrical characteristic indicated. Provide wall-mounted or floor-standing power distribution panelboards as indicated. Provide panelboards suitable for use as service equipment where required. Provide copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bus, and ground bus. Provide insulated/isolated ground buses where indicated. Include overcurrent protective devices and switches in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown. See Section 260180 - Overcurrent Protective Devices.

B. Rate devices, bussing, supports, etc. equal to or greater than the short circuit current rating indicated.

Provide fully-rated systems only. Series-rated systems are not acceptable, unless specifically noted otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL:

A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high lettering on both the interior and exterior of each panelboard enclosure indicating name of panelboard. Bolt and nut or rivet labels to enclosure. (Sheet metal screws are not acceptable).


1. This label shall also indicate the feeder circuit. Mark on interior cover the source of power by

indicating the panel and circuit number.

B. All subpanels shall be labeled to identify the main panel that supplies the feeder circuit.

C. Provide red plastic laminate label for panelboards supplied by emergency power.

D. Provide orange plastic laminate label for panelboards supplied by UPS power. 3.3 MOUNTING:

A. Mount panelboards as indicated, but in no case higher than 6'-6" from finished floor to top of panel. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces.

B. Provide 4" high concrete pad under floor-standing power distribution panelboards.

3.4 CIRCUIT DIRECTORIES:

A. For lighting and appliance panelboards, provide typed panelboard circuit directories. Indicate load description or name and location. Utilize actual building room numbers, not architectural room numbers used on drawings. Label the panel and circuit that feed this panel.

B. For power distribution panelboards, provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high

lettering for each load served.

1. Provide red plastic laminate label for emergency loads. 2. If circuits are changed in a panel, type the new circuit designation and glue on existing circuit

directory. Do not discard existing panelboard schedule unless all circuits have been changed. 3.5 WIRING METHODS:

A. Arrange conductors neatly within enclosure, and secure with suitable nylon ties.

B. Panelboards shall not be used for junction or splicing boxes or as a raceway. 3.6 ARRANGEMENT OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:

A. The overcurrent protective devices shall be in the same sequence and labeled as the panel schedule on the drawings.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah DISCONNECT SWITCHES 260170 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260170 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to disconnect switches. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein.

B. Type of disconnects in this section include the following:

1. General Duty Disconnect Switches 2. Heavy Duty Disconnect Switches 3. Bolted Pressure Switches 4. Fusible Switches



B. SUBMITTALS:

1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on disconnect switches including specifications, installation instructions, etc.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of disconnects showing accurately scaled layouts of disconnects and enclosures.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide disconnect switches (fusible and non-fusible) and fusible switches (in power panels) from one of the following:

1. Cutler-Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Siemens 4. Square D


B. Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide bolted pressure switches from one of the following:

1. Bolt Switch 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Pringle Switch 5. Siemens 6. Square D

2.2 GENERAL:

A. Provide fusible and/or non-fusible disconnect switches and ancillary components of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics as indicated. Provide enclosures in NEMA ratings suitable for applications. Provide fuses as indicated; See Section 260180 - Overcurrent Protective Devices.

2.3 GENERAL DUTY DISCONNECT SWITCHES:

A. Provide 240 volt rated, general duty switches in sheet steel enclosures as indicated of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated and as required to suit respective application. Provide general duty switches for circuits rated 240 volts or less. Construct of spring-assisted, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms. Provide solid neutral as required by application. Equip with operating handle capable of being locked in the OFF position. Provide Class R rejection fuse clips for fusible-type switches.

2.4 HEAVY DUTY DISCONNECT SWITCHES:

A. Provide 600 volt rated, heavy duty switches in sheet steel enclosures as indicated of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated and as required to suit respective application. Provide heavy duty switches for circuits rated greater than 240 volts, but less than 600 volts. Construct of spring-assisted, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms. Provide solid neutral as required by application. Equip with operating handle capable of being locked in the OFF position. Provide Class R rejection fuse clips for fusible-type switches.

2.5 BOLTED PRESSURE SWITCHES:

A. Provide factory-assembled, bolted pressure switches as integral components of floor-standing, distribution switchboards of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated and as required to suit respective application. Provide pressure contacts that clamp at both ends of the switchblade when the blades are fully closed. Provide silver-plated copper for all current-carrying live parts. As standard features, provide quick-make quick-break mechanisms, capacitor trip mechanism, blown main fuse detection, control transformers, full neutral on four wire systems, operating handle capable of being locked in the OFF position, dual fuse door interlock, and external devices indicating status of switch (ON or OFF). Where indicated or as required by codes and/or standards, provide ground fault relays, key interlocks, meters, etc.

2.6 FUSIBLE SWITCHES:

A. Provide factory-assembled, fusible switch units as integral components of distribution power panels and switchboards of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated and as required to suit respective application. Provide quick-make quick-break mechanisms and visible blades. Equip with handle capable of being locked in the OFF position. Provide dual fuse door interlocks. Provide switch with Class R rejection fuse clips. Include copper lugs to accommodate conductors specified.



A. Install disconnects in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high lettering on the exterior of each disconnect indicating name of disconnect or load served. Bolt labels to enclosure. Mark on interior cover the source of power by indicating the panel and circuit number.

B. Provide red plastic laminate label for disconnects supplied by emergency power

3.3 MOUNTING:

A. Mount disconnects as indicated, but in no case higher than 6'-6" from finished floor to top of disconnect. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces.

B. Provide 4" high concrete pad under floor-standing disconnects.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 260180 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260180 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



section making reference to overcurrent protective devices. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of overcurrent protective devices is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein.

B. Type of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following:

1. Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. Electronic Circuit Breakers 3. Fuses 4. Phase Failure Protection 5. Ground Fault Protection



B. SUBMITTALS:

1. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices including specifications, time-current trip characteristics curves, mounting requirements, installation instructions, etc. Submit dimensioned drawings of overcurrent protective devices.



A. Provide overcurrent protective devices and ancillary components of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated. Provide enclosures in NEMA ratings as indicated and suitable for applications.

2.2 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A. MANUFACTURERS:

Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide molded case circuit breakers from one of the following:



B. MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

1. Provide factory-assembled, molded case circuit breakers as integral components of lighting and appliance panelboards, power panelboards, switchboards, and for individual mounting as indicated. Provide thermal magnetic, molded case circuit breakers of amperages, voltages, types, and short circuit current ratings indicated. Provide bolt-on type breakers only. Construct with quick-break, quick-break mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous trip protection for each pole. Provide breakers rated for ambient temperatures to suit respective applications. Provide mechanical screw type removable copper connector lugs of size to accommodate conductors specified.

2. Provide breakers that have interrupting ratings greater than or equal to the specified fault current. Provide fully-rated systems only. Series-rated systems are not acceptable, unless specifically noted otherwise.

2.3 ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

A. VENDORS:

Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide electronic circuit breakers from one of the following:


B. ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

1. Provide factory-assembled, electric circuit breakers as integral components of power panelboards

and switchboards. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, provide electronic circuit breakers in accordance with requirements as set forth in "MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS" above and with features as follows:

2. Provide electronic circuit breakers having the following selectable settings: a) Long time pickup and delay. b) Short time pickup and delay with I2T In and I2T Out features. c) Instantaneous. d) Ground fault pickup and delay with I2T In and I2T Out features.

3. Provide electronic circuit breakers having the following additional features:

a) 80% rated. b) True RMS sensing. c) Interchangeable rating plugs. d) Thermal and magnetic backup protection. e) Long time and ground fault memory.

2.4 FUSES:

A. VENDORS:


Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide fuses from one of the following:

1. Bussmann 2. Gould Shawmut 3. Reliance 4. Littlefuse

B. FUSES:

General: Provide fuses as integral components of disconnects, fusible switches, and bolted pressure switches. Provide fuses in types and sizes as recommended by manufacturer's written instructions. Provide fuses for mains, feeders, and branch circuits as follows:

1. Circuits 601 to 6000 amperes: Shall be protected by current limiting Bussmann Low-Peak Time-

Delay Fuses KRP-C or equivalent. Fuses shall be UL Class L with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical.

2. Motor and Transformer Circuits 0 to 600 amperes: Shall be protected by current-limiting Bussmann Low-Peak Dual Element Fuses LPN-RK (250 volts) or LPS-RK (600 volts) or equivalent. Fuses shall be UL Class RK1 with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical.

3. Feeders to Circuit Breaker Panels 0 to 600 amperes: Shall be protected by current-limiting Bussmann Low-Peak Time Delay fuses LPJ or equivalent. Fuses shall be UL Class RK1 with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s. symmetrical.

C. FUSE CABINETS:

1. Furnish and install fuse cabinet(s) equivalent to Bussmann SFC-FUSE-CAB.

2.5 PHASE FAILURE PROTECTION:

A. MANUFACTURERS:

Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide phase failure relaying equipment from one of the following:

1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Taylor Electronics

B. PHASE FAILURE PROTECTION:

1. Provide phase failure protection to operate shunt trip or electric trip of circuit breakers or bolted

pressure switches as indicated on drawings. Provide phase failure relay with adjustable time delay setting that will protect against phase loss, phase unbalance, phase reversal, and undervoltage. Provide capacitor trip mechanism or control relay to insure that relay will operate under complete loss of power on any phase. A total power loss of any duration will not affect the relay, as the master relay is normally de-energized - to prevent possibility of nuisance tripping. Provide all interconnecting wiring as required. Provide Taylor model PND-R or equivalent from one of the approved manufacturers.

2.6 GROUND FAULT PROTECTION:

A. VENDORS:


Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide ground fault protection equipment from one of the following:

1. Cutler-Hammer 2. General Electric 3. Pringle Electric 4. Siemens 5. Square D

B. GROUND FAULT PROTECTION:

1. Provide ground fault protection systems to operate shunt trip or electric trip of thermal magnetic

circuit breakers or bolted pressure switches and/or as integral components of electronic circuit breakers where indicated on drawings and as required to meet all the requirements as set forth in the NEC. Provide ground fault protection by means of a zero sequence ground fault sensor and ground fault relay. Provide power for ground fault relay through output of current sensor. Provide relay with current settings from 100 through 1200 amperes and time delay of .1 through 1 second. Provide cover that inhibits tampering with settings after installation. Provide means of testing the ground fault system without tripping the breaker or switch to meet the on-site testing requirements of the NEC. Provide visual trip indication for ground fault trip occurrences. Provide all interconnecting wiring as required.


A. Install overcurrent protective devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 SIZING FUSES:

A. Size all fuses in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations, whether fuse size is indicated on drawings or not. If nuisance tripping occurs, increase fuse size and disconnect if necessary as required to provide nuisance-free tripping. Adjust fuse size for proper ambient temperature, frequent starting and stopping of motor loads, and for loads with long start times.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Provide 1/16" thick black plastic laminate labels with 1/4" high lettering on the exterior of each disconnect indicating name of disconnect or load served. Bolt labels to enclosure. Mark on interior cover the source of power by indicating the panel and circuit number.

B. Provide red plastic laminate label for disconnects supplied by emergency power.

3.4 MOUNTING:

A. Mount disconnects as indicated, but in no case higher than 6'-6" from finished floor to top of disconnect. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces.

B. Provide 4" high concrete pad under floor-standing disconnects.


3.5 SETTINGS:

A. Adjust settings of overcurrent protective devices as directed by engineer. 3.6 TESTING OF GROUND FAULT PROTECTION:

A. Have all ground fault protection systems tested by authorized factory representative for proper operation. Replace all malfunctioning units. A complete record of current trip level and time required to trip the disconnecting device shall be submitted to the owner.

3.7 SPARE PARTS:

A. Spare Fuses: For each type and ampere rating, furnish one spare fuse for every 5 provided, but not less than three total.

B. Fuse Cabinets: Furnish and install fuse cabinet(s) in quantities as required, but in no case less than one,

to house the spare fuses indicated above. Locate in main electrical room as directed by the Electrical Engineer.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION 260289 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260289 – SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TVSSs for low-voltage power.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed SPDs. 2. Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed SPDs. 3. Division 26 Section “Motor Control Centers” for factory-installed SPDs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

C. SPD: Surge Protective Device. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Product Certificates: For transient voltage suppression devices, signed by product manufacturer

certifying compliance with the following standards:

1. UL 1283. 2. UL 1449 2nd Edition. 3. UL 281-1 (fuse) 4. CSA 22.2. 5. NEMA LS-1

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transient voltage suppression

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.


3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Products Testing: For transient voltage suppression devices, provide the following product test data:

1. Provide actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results for the ANSA/IEEE

C62.41 Category C3 & C1 (combination wave) and B3 (ringwave) tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.

2. Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device noise attenuation equal or exceeds 50 db at 100 kHz.

3. Provide test report in compliance with NEMA LS1 from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying that suppressor components can survive published surge current rating on both

a per mode and per phase basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8 x 20 microsecond current wave. Note that test data on individual module is not accepted.

E. Field quality-control test reports, including the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transient voltage suppression devices to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, "IEEE Guide for Surge Environment in Low Voltage (1000 V

and Less) AC Power Circuits," IEEE C62.41.2-2002, “IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits,” and test devices according to IEEE C62.45-2002, "IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits."

C. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices."

D. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449 2nd Edition, "Transient

Voltage Surge Suppressors."

E. The manufacturer shall by ISO 9000 certified.

F. Comply with Military Standards MIL-STD220A.

G. Comply with FIPS Pub 94.

H. Comply with NEC 2002, Article 285, “Transient Voltage Surge Suppression TVSSs”. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility


services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

B. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: -40 to 140 deg F. 3. Humidity: 5 to 95 percent, non-condensing. 4. Altitude: Up to 20,000 feet above sea level.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for maintenance. Coordinate placement of breakers in electrical panelboards feeding field-mounted surge suppressors so that conductor leads are kept to an absolute minimum.

B. Coordinate surge protection devices with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fails in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Current Technology, Inc. 2. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation. 3. EFI Electronics 4. General Electric Company. 5. LEA International. 6. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 7. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson. 8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 9. Square D; Schneider Electric. 10. United Power Corporation.

2.2 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL

A. Electrical Requirements:

1. Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The MCOV shall be greater than 115% of

the nominal system operating voltage.


3. The suppression system shall incorporate a hybrid designed Metal-Oxide Varistors (MOV) surge suppressor for the service entrance and other distribution level. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cell, air gaps or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards.

4. Protection Modes – For a wye-configured system, the device must have directly connected suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground (N-G). For a delta-configured system, the device must have suppression elements between line to line (L-L) and line to ground (L-G).

5. UL 1449 2nd Edition Suppressed Voltage Rating (SVR) – The maximum UL 1449 2nd Edition SVR for the device must not exceed the following: a. 208Y/120 V:

1) L-N; L-G; N-G: 400 V. 2) L-L: 800 V.

b. 480Y/277 V: 1) L-N; L-G; N-G: 800 V. 2) L-L: 1800 V.

6. ANSI/IEEE Cat. C3 Let Through Voltage – The let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3 surges (20 kV, 10 kA) shall be less than: a. 208Y/120 V L-N: 560 V. b. 480Y/277 V L-N: 960 V.

7. ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 Let Through Voltage – Let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for the ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 ringwave (6 kV, 500 amps) shall be less than: a. 208Y/120 V L-N: 160 V. b. 480Y/277 V L-N: 165 V.

B. SPD Design

1. Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating TVSS modules shall not be acceptable.

2. Electrical Noise Filter – Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 50 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. Products not able to demonstrate noise attenuation of 50 dB @ 100 kHz shall be rejected.

3. Extended Range Filter – The Surge Protective Device shall have a High Frequency Extended Range Tracking Filter in each Line to Neutral mode with compliance to UL 1283 and NEMA LS1. The filter shall have published high frequency attenuation rating in the attenuation frequencies: a. Insertion Loss (ratio):

1) 50kHz: 40 2) 100kHz: 316 3) 500kHz: 316 4) 1MHz: 89 5) 10MHz: 200 6) 100MHz: 79

b. Insertion Loss (dB): 1) 50kHz: 32 2) 100kHz: 50 3) 500kHz: 50 4) 1MHz: 39 5) 10MHz: 46 6) 100MHz: 38

4. Internal Connections – No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as


surge current conductors. All internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors and compression fittings.

5. Standard Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide integral monitoring options: a. Each unit shall provide a green / red solid state indicator light shall be provided on each

phase. The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate which phase(s) have been damaged.

b. Contacts for Remote Status Monitoring – The SPD device must include form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of unit status. The remote alarm shall change state if any of the three phases detect a fault condition.

6. Monitoring Diagnostics:

a. Audible Alarm – The SPD shall provide an audible alarm with a reset pushbutton that will be activated under any fault condition.

b. Event Counter – The SPD shall be equipped with a LCD display system designed to indicate to the user how many surges, sags, swells and outages have occurred at the location. The event counter triggers each time under each respective category after significant even occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard allowing all counters to be zeroed.

c. Push to Test – The SPD shall be equipped with push-to-test feature, designed to provide users with real time testing of the suppressor’s monitoring and diagnostic system. By depressing the test button, the diagnostic system initiates a self test procedure. If the system is fully operational, the self test will activate all indicator lights.

d. Voltage Monitoring – The SPD shall display true Root Mean Square (RMS) on three L-N voltage protection mode on Wye configuration and three L-L voltage on delta configuration.

e. Non Volatile Memory – The SPD shall at least be able to save the last 1000 events.

7. Overcurrent Protection Fusing: In order to isolate the SPD under any fault condition, the manufacturer shall provide: a. Individual Fusing: MOV’s shall be individually fused via Copper Fuse Trace. The Copper

Fuse shall allow protection during high surge (kA) events. SPD shall safely reach an end-of-life condition when subjected to fault current levels between 0 and 200 kA, including low level fault currents from 5 to 5000 amperes.

b. Thermal Protection: MOV’s shall be equipped with Thermal Fuse Spring (TFS) technology which allows disconnection of the suppression component at the overheated stage common during temporary over voltage condition. For small fault currents between 100mA to 30Amp, or if the occurrence is over a longer period of time, the TFS will disconnect first. Manufacturers that utilize fuse trace only shall not be approved since there is no fault current protection between 100mA to 30A,

c. All overcurrent protection components shall be tested in compliance with UL 1449-Limited Current Test and AIC rating test.

C. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capability as per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45 –

2002:

1. The suppression filter system shall be repetitive surge tested in every mode utilizing a 1.2 x 50 microseconds, 20kV open circuit voltage. 8 x 20 microsecond, 10kA short circuit current Category C3 bi-wave at one minute intervals without suffering either performance degradation or more than 10% deviation of clamping voltage at a specified surge current. The minimum repetitive surge current capability as per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and ANSI/IEEE C62.45 – 1992 shall be: a. Service Entrance: 5000 impulse per mode. b. Distribution Locations: 5000 impulse per mode.


c. Branch Locations: 5000 impulse per mode.

2.3 SYSTEM APPLICATION

A. Locations – Electrical drawings indicate the location and IEEE Category requirements of all required SPD’s.

B. Surge Current Capacity – The minimum total surge current 8 x 20 microsecond waveform that the device

is capable of withstanding shall be as follows:

1. IEEE Category “C” Locations: a. Per Phase: 240kA. b. Per Mode: 120kA.

2. IEEE Category “B” Locations: a. Per Phase: 150kA. b. Per Mode: 80kA.

3. IEEE Category “A” Locations: a. Per Phase: 100kA. b. Per Mode: 60kA.

C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboard Requirements – Any one of the following options are acceptable:

1. Factory-Installed SPD Option: a. The SPD shall not limit the use of Through-feed lugs, Sub-feed lugs and Sub-feed breaker

options. b. The SPD shall be immediately installed on the load side of the main breaker or main lugs. c. The panelboard shall be capable of re-energizing upon removal of the TVSS. d. A direct bus bar connection shall be used to mount the TVSS component to the panelboard

bus bar to reduce the impedance of the shunt path. e. The SPD panelboard shall be constructed using a direct bus bar connection (cable

connection between bus bar and TVSS device in not acceptable). TVSS units that use a cable connection do not meet the intent of this specification. For this option, the breaker shown on the electrical drawings shall be deleted.

f. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer of the panelboard.

g. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard. h. The complete panelboard including the TVSS shall be UL67 listed.

2. Electronic grade Panelboard Extension Option: a. The SPD shall not limit the use of Through-feed lugs, Sub-feed lugs and Sub-feed breaker

options. b. The SPD shall be installed in an panelboard extension consisting of a box and trim as

follows: 1) Box: The unit’s box shall be formed of galvanized and chemically cleansed metal

and all breaks in galvanizing shall be painted with metallic paint. Minimum size shall be 16“ high and in width and depth to match the panelboard dimensions. It shall have removable tope and bottom end-plates to facilitate attachment to the top of bottom of a panelboard (also with removable end-plates) in order to provide a continuous barrier-free volume for routing feeder or branch wiring through the extension box. Collar hardware shall be provided to mate the panelboard and the box.

2) Trim: The unit shall be constructed with gray baked enamel sheet metal trim suitable for attachment to the panelboard. Trim shall be flush- or surface mounted to match panelboard trim requirements. Refer to panelboard schedules.

c. Provide a multi-pole circuit breaker in the panelboard in size as recommended by the


manufacturer to feed the surge suppressor. The size of the breaker shall supersede the size of the breaker shown on the electrical drawings.

d. Provide copper conductors in size as recommended by the manufacturer for connecting the phases, neutral, and ground between the surge suppressor and the circuit breaker in the panelboard. The size of the conductor shall supersede the size of the conductors shown on the electrical drawings.

3. Wall-Mounted and/or Retrofit Application Option: a. The SPD shall be wall-mounted immediately adjacent to the panelboard. Conform to all

NEC clearance requirements. b. Provide a multi-pole circuit breaker in the panelboard in size as recommended by the

manufacturer to feed the surge suppressor. The size of the breaker shall supersede the size of the breaker shown on the electrical drawings.

c. Provide copper conductors in size as recommended by the manufacturer for connecting the phases, neutral, and ground between the surge suppressor and the circuit breaker in the panelboard. The size of the conductor shall supersede the size of the conductors shown on the electrical drawings. Route conductors in conduit sized in accordance with all NEC requirements.

D. Power Distribution Panelboard, Motor Control Center, and Switchboard Requirements – Any one of the

following options are acceptable:

1. Factory-Installed SPD Option: a. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the power distribution panelboard, motor

control center, or switchboard. b. The SPD shall be factory installed inside the power distribution panelboard, motor control

center, or switchboard at the assembly point by the original equipment manufacturer. c. Locate suppressor on load side of main disconnect device or main lugs, as close as possible

to the phase conductors and ground/neutral bar. d. Provide a disconnect sized in accordance with all manufacturer’s recommendations. The

disconnect shall be directly integrated to the suppressor and assembly bus by using bolted bus bar connections. The disconnect is the preferred method. If otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, provide a multi-pole circuit breaker in the panelboard in size as recommended by the manufacturer to feed the surge suppressor. The size of the breaker shall supersede the size of the breaker shown on the electrical drawings. Provide copper conductors in size as recommended by the manufacturer for connecting the phases, neutral, and ground between the surge suppressor and the circuit breaker in the panelboard. The size of the conductor shall supersede the size of the conductors shown on the electrical drawings.

e. The SPD shall be integral to power distribution panelboard, motor control center, or switchboard as factory standardized design.

f. All monitoring diagnostics features shall be visible from the front of the equipment. 2. Wall-Mounted and/or Retrofit Applications Option:

a. The SPD shall be wall-mounted immediately adjacent to the panelboard. Conform to all NEC clearance requirements.

b. Provide a multi-pole circuit breaker in the panelboard in size as recommended by the manufacturer to feed the surge suppressor. The size of the breaker shall supersede the size of the breaker shown on the electrical drawings.

c. Provide copper conductors in size as recommended by the manufacturer for connecting the phases, neutral, and ground between the surge suppressor and the circuit breaker in the panelboard. The size of the conductor shall supersede the size of the conductors shown on the electrical drawings. Route conductors in conduit sized in accordance with all NEC requirements.

2.4 ENCLOSURES


A. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings or as described below:

1. NEMA 1/3R rainproof enclosures intended for outdoor use primarily to provide protection against rain, sleet and damage from external ice formation.

2. NEMA 12 dust-tight enclosures intended for indoor use primarily to provide protection against circulating dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids. (Panelboards Only)

3. NEMA 4 watertight stainless steel intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing rain, hose-directed water, and damage from external ice formation. (Side Mounted Unites Only)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground. B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor and

points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground at TVSS.

3.2 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect electrical equipment to their sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected.


A. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, "Surge

Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain surge protective devices. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures” or “Demonstration and Training" as may be applicable.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 260435 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260435 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study.

1. Coordination of series-rated devices is permitted where indicated on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets. 2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports. 3. Coordination-Study Report.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CONSTRUCTION

A. The results of the short-circuit, protective device coordination and arc flash hazard analysis studies shall be summarized in a final report. No more than five (5) bound copies of the complete final report shall be submitted. For large system studies, submittals requiring more than five (5) copies of report will be provided without the section containing the computer printout of the short-circuit input and output data. Additional copies of the short-circuit input and output data, where required, shall be provided on CD in PDF format.

B. For large system studies with more than 200 bus locations, the contractor is required to provide the study project files to the owner in electronic format. In addition, a copy of the computer analysis software viewer program is required to accompany the electronic project files, to allow the owner to review all aspects of the project and print arc flash labels, one-line diagrams, and other items.

C. The report shall include the following sections:


1. Executive summary 2. Descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope of the study 3. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device rating versus calculated short

circuit duties 4. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker

trip unit settings, fuse selection 5. Fault current calculations, including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the

computer printout 6. Details of the incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations 7. Recommendations for system improvements, where needed 8. One-line diagram

D. Arc flash labels shall be provided in hard copy only.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. The equipment manufacturer or approved engineering firm shall demonstrate experience with arc flash hazard analysis by submitting names of at least ten actual arc flash hazard analyses it has performed in the past year.

D. The contractor shall furnish an arc flash hazard analysis study, per the requirements set forth in NFPA 70E – Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

E. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

F. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

G. Comply with 1584 – Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Available Computer Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, companies offering computer software programs that may be used in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. CGI CYME. 2. EDSA Micro Corporation.


3. ESA Inc. 4. Operation Technology, Inc. 5. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features: a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats, showing the

following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios.


d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material, insulation, and

length. f. Busway ampacity and impedance. g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or

current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the following:

1. Switchgear and switchboard bus. 2. Medium-voltage controller. 3. Motor-control center. 4. Distribution panelboard. 5. Branch circuit panelboard.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 241 and IEEE 242.

1. Transformers: a. ANSI C57.12.10. b. ANSI C57.12.22. c. ANSI C57.12.40.


d. IEEE C57.12.00. e. IEEE C57.96.

2. Medium-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.010. 3. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 4. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

2. Show interrupting (5-cycle) and time-delayed currents (6 cycles and above) on medium-voltage breakers as needed to set relays and assess the sensitivity of overcurrent relays.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-circuit

currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following: a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is specified

for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by unusual

loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or


total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices: a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information: a. Device tag. b. Voltage and current ratio for curves. c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. e. Cable damage curves. f. Transformer inrush points. g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

G. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584 equations that are presented in NFPA70E-2004, Annex D.

B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway, and splitters) where work could be performed on energized parts.

C. The arc flash hazard analysis shall include all significant locations to 240 volt and 209 volt systems fed from transformers equal to, or greater than, 125 kVA , where work could be performed on energized parts.

D. Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary, considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.

E. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and coordination study model. Ground overcurrrent relays should not be taken into consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations.

F. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for multiple system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy must be uniquely reported for each equipment location. Calculations must be performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a


minimum mother contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount of motors to be operating. Calculations shall take into considering the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable.

G. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators should be decremented as follows.

1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3-5 cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match the actual

decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g. contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).

H. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall include both the line and load side of the main breaker.

I. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker, as required above, the line side and load side contributions must be included in the fault calculation.

J. Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to computer the incident energy for the corresponding location.

K. Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds, based on IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be utilized.

3.6 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. The contractor of the arc flash hazard analysis shall provide a 3.5 inch x 5 inch thermal transfer-type label of high adhesion polyester for each work location analyzed.

B. All labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device setting and will be provided after the results of the analysis have been presented to the owner, and after any system changes, upgrades, or modifications have been incorporated in the system.

C. The label shall included the following information, at a minimum: 1. Location designation 2. Nominal voltage 3. Flash protection boundary 4. Hazard risk category 5. Incident energy 6. Working distance 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date

D. Labels shall be machine-printing, with no field markings.


E. Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings. 1. For each 600, 480, and applicable 208 volt panelboard, one arc flash label shall be provided. 2. For each motor control center, one arc flash label shall be provided. 3. For each low-voltage switchboard, one arc flash label shall be provided. 4. For each switchgear, on flash label shall be provided. 5. For medium voltage switches, one arc flash label shall be provided.

F. Labels shall be field-installed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

3.7 ARC FLASH TRAINING

A. The contractor of the arc flash hazard analysis shall train the owner’s qualified electrical personnel of the potential arc flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment (minimum of 4 hours). The training shall be certified for continuing education units (CEUs) by the International Association for Continuing Education Training (IACET), or equivalent.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah GROUNDING 260452 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260452 – GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to grounding. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein.

B. Ground the complete electrical installation including the system neutral, metallic conduits and raceways, boxes, fittings, devices, cabinets, equipment, and separately derived systems in accordance with the NEC and all other applicable codes to provide a permanent, continuous, low impedance, grounding system.

C. Provide grounding system such that the resistance from the service entrance ground bus, through the

grounding electrode to earth is not greater than 5 ohms.



B. TESTING: Submit results of ground resistance testing as specified in this section. Include name of testing agency with report. Include test results in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Provide grounding equipment and accessories of types, sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated or as otherwise required to provide a complete system.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS:

A. Unless noted otherwise, provide grounding conductors with stranding and insulation types to match phase conductors. Provide conductors with green insulation if possible; otherwise wrap with green tape. Size ground conductors as indicated on drawings. Do not size ground conductors smaller than that allowable by NEC.

2.3 GROUND RODS:

A. Provide copper clad, steel, 3/4" diameter by 10' long, ground rods ( Weaver, Cadweld, or equivalent). 2.4 TEST WELLS:


A. Provide precast concrete box 9-1/2" W. x 16" L. x 18" D. with light duty concrete cover for non-traffic areas or rated steel plate for traffic areas. Provide covers with lifting holes. Engrave cover with "Ground Rod".

2.5 CONCRETE ENCASED GROUNDING ELECTRODE (UFER GROUND):

A. Provide a bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with the earth and where there is no impervious water-proofing membrane between the footing and the soil. Size UFER ground conductor in accordance with the NEC. Extend conductor through a horizontal length of 30' minimum and encase with not less than 2 nor more than 5 inches of concrete separating it from surrounding soils.

2.6 INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS:

A. Provide plated malleable iron body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating throat, lay-in grounding lug with hardened stainless steel fasteners (OZ Gedney BLG or equivalent).

2.7 CONNECTION TO PIPES:

A. Provide heavy duty, cast bronze, ground clamp systems with silicon bronze bolts and nuts (OZ Gedney G Series - B or equivalent).

2.8 CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS, OR SPLICES:

A. Provide exothermic welds. (Cadweld or equivalent) 2.9 BONDING JUMPERS:

A. Provide bonding jumpers with hot dip galvanized malleable or ductile iron clamps, hot dip galvanized steel U-bolts, and tinned copper braids (OZ Gedney BJ Series or equivalent).

2.10 GROUND BUS:

A. Provide 1/4" x 4", copper ground bus complete with insulators and brackets in lengths and at mounting heights as indicated on drawings. Furnish complete with drilled holes and lugs to accommodate grounding conductors.


A. Install grounding systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 CLEANING:

A. Thoroughly clean all metal contact surfaces prior to installation of clamp-on connectors. 3.3 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS:

A. Ground each separately derived system in accordance with NEC Section 250-16 unless otherwise


indicated on drawings. 3.4 SERVICE ENTRANCE GROUNDING:

A. Connect the following items using NEC sized copper grounding conductors (in NEC sized, conduits if concealment is required) to lugs on the service ground bus:

1. Conductor from the UFER ground. 2. Conductor from two ground rods driven exterior to building at not less than 10' apart. 3. Conductor from main incoming cold water piping system. 4. Conductor from building structural steel. 5. Conductor from separately derived systems. 6. Conductor from insulated ground bushings on service entrance conduits. 7. Additional ground rods as required to achieve resistance value specified. 8. Additional items indicated on drawings.

3.5 EQUIPMENT BONDING AND GROUNDING:

A. Provide an NEC sized conductor, whether indicated or not on the drawings, in raceways as follows:

1. Non-metallic conduits and ducts. 2. Distribution feeders. 3. Motor and equipment branch circuits. 4. Device and lighting branch circuits. 5. Full length of all multi-outlet assemblies and other surface wireways.

3.6 ADDITIONAL GROUNDING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Provide grounding bushings on all service conduit and conduits installed in concentric/eccentric knock-outs or reducing washer at panelboards, cabinets, and gutters.

B. Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in conduit runs, across pipe

connections at water meters, and across dielectric couplings in metallic cold water piping system. Connection to water piping system shall be made electrically continuous by connecting to the street side of the water main valve and/or installing additional bonding jumpers across the meter, valves or service unions that might be disconnected.

C. Provide bonding wire in all flexible conduits.

D. Isolated Ground Circuits: Circuits used for isolated ground outlets shall be run in separate raceways or

shall have a separate green insulated ground conductor installed and tagged for identification at all outlet and junction boxes.

3.7 TEST WELLS:

A. All ground rods shall be driven external to building and shall be located in ground well boxes. Locate in landscaped areas where possible.

3.8 TESTING:

A. Obtain and record ground resistance measurements both from service entrance ground bus to the ground electrode and from the ground electrode to earth. Install additional bonding and grounding electrodes as required to comply with resistance limits specified under this Section. Use independent testing agency for all testing.



APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 260510 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260510 - INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to interior and exterior building lighting. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of interior and exterior building lighting work is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein.

B. Type of lighting fixtures in this section include the following:

1. Fluorescent 2. Incandescent / Halogen 3. High Intensity Discharge (HID)


A. STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable. Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association standards and carry the CBM label.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior building lighting fixtures.

Submit dimensioned drawings of all lighting fixtures. Identify light fixtures by type and submit in alphabetical order.


A. Provide light fixtures of types as indicated on drawings or as approved by addenda. Provide light fixtures complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring, etc. Provide all light fixtures with safety latches where applicable.

B. Provide all detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling accessories, louvers, diffusers, lenses, and reflectors

with locking catches, screws, safety chains, or safety cables.

C. Provide all exterior fixtures with damp or wet location labels as required by application.

D. Provide all light fixtures and support accessories as required for a complete system.

E. Consult architectural drawings for louvers (if any) to be provided by Division 26.


2.2 FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES:

A. FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:

1. Electronic: a. Manufacturers: Provide electronic ballasts from manufacturers specified as an integral

part of light fixtures on the light fixture schedule. Where "generic" electronic ballasts are specified, provide products of one of the following for each fixture type: 1) Advance Transformer 2) Magnetek 3) Motorola 4) Osram Sylvania

b. Electronic Ballasts: Whether specified specifically or generically, provide electronic, fluorescent lamp ballasts for each type of fluorescent fixture capable of operating lamps indicated. Provide high power factor (97% or greater), Class P, sound-rated A, and internally thermally protected ballasts. Provide ballasts with input third harmonic content not exceeding 10% for 120V ballasts and less than 15% for 277V ballasts, average lamp current crest factor of 1.7, frequency of operation 20 KHz or greater, and non-PCB capacitors. Unless specifically noted otherwise, provide all interior light fixtures, with full light output electronic ballasts. Equip all exterior light fixtures with low temperature starting ballasts. Comply with all manufacturer's written recommendations for all lamp-ballast combinations.

c. Programmed Start Electronic Ballasts: Electronic ballasts shall be programmed start for maximum lamp life on shorter start cycles. Filament voltage shall be applied prior to the application of open circuit voltage to allow adequate heating of the filaments and then open circuit voltage is applied to start the lamps. Ballasts shall provide for a minimum lamp starting temperature of 0 Degrees F.

d. End-of-Life Circuitry: Ballasts for lamps of T5 and smaller including T5, T4, and T2 diameter shall contain end-of-life sensing circuitry to prevent lamp bulb, lamp base, or socket damage at lamp end-of-life.

2. Dimming: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of one of

the following for each fixture type: 1) Lutron 2) Dimming Ballasts:

b. Dimming ballasts shall be provided as part of a fluorescent dimming system where ballasts and controls are made by the same manufacturer. Refer to Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers Section 140 - Wiring Devices.

c. Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P thermally protected and meet ANSI C62.41 (IEEE Publication 587, category A for surge protection.

d. Dimming shall be smooth and continuous without flicker down to 1% light levels for T-12, and T-8 lamps (5% for T-5 lamps).

e. Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than .95. ballast factor equal to .93, total harmonic distortion less than 10%, and lamp current crest factor less than or equal to 1.6.

f. Ballasts shall be inaudible in a 27dB ambient throughout the dimming range. g. Ballasts shall be capable of striking lamps at any light level without first flashing to full

light. h. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Part 18 regulations and shall not interfere with other

properly installed electrical equipment, i. Ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 10 Degrees C. j. Ballasts shall be free of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).

3. Ballast Disconnect: a. Fluorescent fixtures that can be serviced-in-place shall come equipped with a disconnecting


means that allows the ballast to be disconnected simultaneously from all conductors during maintenance and repair. The means of disconnect shall be placed so that it is accessible to all individuals before service of the fixture or ballast is initiated.

b. The line-side terminals of the ballast disconnect shall also be guarded. c. The ballast disconnect shall adhere to the requirements outlined in the code, NEC 2005

410.73(G).

B. FLUORESCENT LAMPS:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of one of the following for each fixture type: a. General Electric b. Phillips c. Osram Sylvania

2. Lamps: Provide fluorescent lamps in types, wattages, and sizes as indicated on fixture schedule. Unless specifically noted otherwise, equip interior light fixtures with full light output, energy-conserving, fluorescent lamps.

3. T-8 Lamps: Where T-8 lamps are specified, provide General Electric "Trimline", Sylvania "Octron", or Phillips only with initial lumens outputs of 2950 minimum.

4. Provide TCLP-compliant lamps where available from the manufacturer.

C. DIFFUSERS: Where acrylic diffusers are specified, provide 100 percent virgin acrylic compound with minimum thickness of .125 inches.

2.3 INCANDESCENT / HALOGEN LIGHT FIXTURES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of one of the following for each fixture type:

1. General Electric 2. Phillips 3. Osram Sylvania

B. Incandescent Lamps: Provide incandescent lamps in types, wattages, and sizes as indicated on the light

fixture schedule.

C. Halogen Lamps: Provide halogen lamps with increased LPW (IR technology) or improved optics in types, wattages, and sizes as indicated on the light fixture schedule.

2.4 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LIGHT FIXTURES:

A. HID BALLASTS:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of one of the following for each fixture type: a. Advance Transformer b. General Electric c. Universal

2. Ballasts: Provide electromagnetic, constant wattage, HID lamp ballasts for each type of HID fixture capable of operating lamps indicated. Provide high power factor (90% of greater) ballasts. Provide HID ballasts for each HID fixture with features in accordance with all manufacturer's written recommendations. Equip all exterior light fixtures with low temperature (-10 degree F.) starting ballasts. Comply with all manufacturer's written recommendations for all lamp-ballast combinations.


B. HID LAMPS:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of one of the

following for each fixture type: a. General Electric b. Phillips c. Osram Sylvania d. Venture

2. Lamps: Provide HID lamps in types, wattages, and sizes as indicated on fixture schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL:

A. Install interior and exterior light fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS:

A. RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES:

1. Lay-in Ceilings: Support all light fixtures in lay-in ceilings independent from the ceiling system. Support each recessed light fixture from the building structure with #12 gauge steel wire attached to each corner. Provide clips to securely fasten lay-in light fixtures to Tee-Bars. Provide suspension bars for downlight fixtures in lay-in ceilings.

2. Gypsum Board, Plaster, or Similar Ceilings: Support all light fixtures in hard ceilings independent from the ceiling system. Support each recessed light fixture from the building structure with #12 gauge steel wire attached to each corner. Provide backing supports and all mounting accessories as required.

3. Fire Ratings: Provide gypsum board protection for each light fixture recessed in fire-rated ceiling as required to maintain fire rating of penetrated ceiling.

B. SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES: Support all surface mounted fixtures from a 4" square

octagonal outlet box connected to a standard 3/8" stud or box hangar where applicable. Include backing and supports as required to support weight of light fixture.

C. PENDANT AND STEM MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES: Provide pendants, rigid conduit stems, and

flexible ball joint hangers for all pendant and stem hung fixtures. 3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:

A. Protect installed and non-installed fixtures from damage during construction period.

B. Thoroughly clean all interior and exterior light fixtures. Do not mar or scar reflectors or diffusers. Repair all nicks and scratches to appearance of original finish. Remove protective plastic coverings on light fixtures at completion of project.

3.4 WIRING METHODS:

A. Route a minimum of 36" of 3/8" flexible conduit to each lay-in light fixture directly from an outlet box.


Unless specified otherwise, flexible conduit shall not exceed 72" in length. Do not loop flexible conduit from fixture to fixture.

B. Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections for each lighting fixture.

3.5 COORDINATION:

A. Refer to architectural reflected ceiling drawings for exact location and quantities of light fixtures, and ceiling types. Where conflicts occur between the architectural and electrical drawings, or where fixtures types do not coordinate with ceiling systems, notify architect/engineer prior to bid. After bid and award of contract, provide all light fixtures as required to meet the intent of the construction documents. Coordinate fixture layouts and installations with ceiling installer prior to submitting shop drawings and during construction. Fluorescent light fixtures shall be not less than 1/2" from combustible materials.

3.6 SPARE PARTS:

A. LAMPS: Provide 15% spare lamps, but in no case less than one, of each type, wattage, and size used for the project.

B. ACRYLIC DIFFUSERS: Provide a spare acrylic diffusers and/or glass for each light fixture type and

one for each additional unit for each ten fixtures. The quantity of any single type need not exceed 10.

C. ELECTRONIC BALLASTS: Provide 2% spare electronic ballasts. 3.7 WARRANTY:

A. LAMPS: Warranty incandescent and fluorescent lamps for a period of two months from substantial completion.

B. ELECTRONIC BALLASTS: Warranty electronic ballasts for parts and labor for complete replacement

for a period of five years. Warranty shall include an allowance for nominal replacement labor and replacement of defective product.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 260560 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 260560 - LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REALTED DOCUMENTS:



sections making reference to lighting control equipment. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Install a Low Voltage Switching System consisting of relay panels and intelligent switches and/or photocells connected together by a dataline, as well as all associated wiring.

B. The system includes a DIN rail mounted timeclock, photosensor control module and/or other low voltage

control devices. These devices are totally compatible with the manual operation of the softwired switches.

C. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in the specifications for work including, but not limited to, raceways and electrical boxes and fitting required for installation of control equipment and wiring.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Component Pre-testing: All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested prior to installation.

C. System Support: Factory applications engineers shall be available for telephone support.

D. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical wiring work.

E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of

electrical equipment and enclosures.

F. UL Approvals: Remote panels are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment.

G. CSA Approvals: Remote panels are to be CSA listed.

H. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions Standards specified in Part 15 Subpart J for Class A application.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional drawings of all lighting control system components and accessories.

B. One Line Diagram: Submit a one line diagram of the system configuration proposed if it differs from that illustrated in the riser diagram included in the contract drawings.


C. Typical Wiring Diagrams: Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited

to, relay panels, relays, dataline low voltage switches, occupancy sensors and daylighting controls. 1.5 MANUFACTURERS

A. The basis of the specified system is the ProSys Lighting Control System manufactured by General Electric. Any other system wishing to be considered must submit descriptive information 10 days prior to bid. Prior approval does not guarantee final approval by the electrical engineer. The contractor shall be completely responsible for providing a system meeting this specification in its entirety. All deviations from this specification must be listed and individually signed off by the consultant.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 HUBBELL BUILDING AUTOMATION LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL “LXEN32S”

A. Description

1. Modular Relay Panels shall be UL listed and consist of the following: a. Tub: Empty NEMA 1 enclosure that can accept an interior sized to accept up to 12, 24, or

48 GE RR7P or RR9P relays. b. Power Supply: Transformer assembly with two 40VA transformers with separate

secondaries. Transformers include internal overcurrent protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection against power line spikes. 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz. +/- 10%.

c. Cover: Surface with captive screws in a hinged, lockable configuration. A wiring schedule directory card shall be affixed to the cover's back.

d. Interior: Bracket and intelligence board backplane with pre-mounted relays. Interiors shall be provided with up to 12, 24, or 48 installed and tested relays.

2. Panel shall be provided with an integral DIN rail mounting bar for easy installation of other system components (such as ProSys clock). Terminals shall be included in the interior to accept a dataline for the connection of softwired dataline switches to the system, or to allow a dataline to be run between multiple panels for network communications between the panels.

3. Panel shall be provided with individual ON/OFF switches for both panel and dataline power. 4. Eight channels shall be provided in each interior regardless of size, each with an associated

pushbutton to toggle the channel ON/OFF, and a terminal block for a separate dry contact input. Any number of relays in the panel can be assigned to each channel, with overlapping allowed. Channels shall be set up via “Softwiring”, i.e. no hand held programmer or keypad is required. Systems that require programmers or keypads, or that change relay states during set up are not acceptable. Each channel pushbutton shall provide LED state indication - RED shall indicate that all of the relays within the channel group are ON; NO LED shall indicate that all of the relays within the group are OFF, and GREEN shall indicate the channel’s relays are in a MIXED state.

5. System shall accept future functionality upgrades without removal of the panel.

B. Features

1. Relays shall be momentary-pulsed mechanically latching contactors rated at 20 amps, 120 - 277

VAC. They shall attach to the Interior by a single plug-in connector. 2. Next to each relay shall be an individual override button and an LED to indicate state. LED shall

indicate RELAY ON, RELAY OFF. 3. Captive screw terminations will be provided for all wiring connections.


4. Each channel button’s dry control contact input terminal shall accept either 2 or 3-wire, maintained or momentary inputs. They shall also accept a 2-wire toggling input.

5. Each channel shall also have an associated 1 amp, 30 VDC isolated contact which may be used for status feedback or pilot light control.

6. The Relay Panel shall use an EEPROM to record the channel softwiring assignments and the current status of all relays, thus insuring a 40-year backup of information in the event of a power failure. Systems that require a chargeable battery with less than 10 year’s life shall not be allowed.

7. The unit shall provide LED status indication of the power supply status. Access to 24VAC and 24V rectified power for accessory devices shall be provided within the panel.

8. System shall comply with the LonMark® lighting controller profile and provide capability for network binding to LonMark compliant building automation system components without the use of dry contacts, gateways, protocol converters or additional systems devices.

2.2 NETWORK DATALINE

A. Description

1. The intelligence in multiple panels shall be linked over a single dataline that uses the open Echelon/LonTalk™ protocol for communications, and be fully LonMark® and LNS (LonWorks® Network Services) compliant. The dataline shall provide a highly reliable communications bus for transferring control and status between the relay panels. The dataline shall be self-powering at each relay panel and not require any ancillary equipment to function properly.

2. The dataline, in addition to linking together multiple relay panels, shall be capable of extending out from the electrical closet, and provide a single communications bus to allow softwired dataline switches to communicate with the panels.

3. The dataline can also connect to a single softwired dataline timeclock mounted in the interior of a relay panel or a separate enclosure at another location.

B. Features

1. Dataline shall be 18/4 twisted conductor with shield meeting Class 2P NEC code requirements.

The dataline can be run in a loop, serial, or star configuration. Minimum 1 turn per 3 inches; 50 pf/ft. max.

2. Maximum length for all dataline wire in the system is 1,500 feet. 3. Maximum number of devices (panels/switch modules/timeclocks) on a dataline is 127.

2.3 SOFTWIRED DATALINE SWITCHES

A. Description

1. To allow individual overrides, dataline switches shall be terminated to each panel’s 4 wire “Local Dataline”. Switches shall be available in either single, dual, quad, or octal (1 button, 2 button, 4 button, or 8 button) designs. The single, dual, and quad devices mount in a standard single gang box, while the octal version mounts in a two gang box.

2. Each button in a switch module can be individually programmed. Programming is done by a “Softwiring Sequence” rather than with a handheld keypad or laptop. Each button can be assigned to any one of the following four functions: a. Control any individual relay in any single panel b. Control any group of relays in any single panel c. Control any of the eight channels (A-H) in a single panel d. Control the same channel letter (A-H) in any chosen group of panels in the system.

3. For applications that require pattern switching, any button can perform its function using an “ON/OFF/Not Controlled” pattern of relays instead of the normal All ON/All OFF.


B. Features

1. Switches shall have a non-breakable Lexan body and a matching screwless Lexan wallplate. 2. Each switch module shall use a bi-color LED pilot light for the individual buttons to indicate status

of the controlled relay or group of relays. LED indications are Red for All ON, Green for Mixed State (some relays in the group ON and others OFF), and No LED for All OFF.

3. Switch shall also include a locator light. 4. Individual buttons shall have a removable clear cover to allow standard 3/8 inch tape to use for

labeling the controlled loads. 5. The dual, quad, and octal switches shall all include a single master button that will override all

relays controlled by the individual buttons OFF, or Restore them to their original state. Each switch unit’s master button function can be configured to perform a “Master On/Off”, “OFF Only”, or “Disabled” function if desired.

6. Dip switches on the back of the module shall allow switch units to be designated for “Cleaning Crew” Control. This prevents the switch from turning off the occupant’s lights accidentally.

7. Each switch module is available in a Smart Keylock version. Once a key is inserted, the individual buttons will function for five minutes.

2.4 SOFTWIRED CLOCK

A. Description

1. Using the same dataline as mentioned above, provide a softwired timeclock. From any plug-in point on the dataline, timeclock can be used to: (1) schedule any of the 8 channel groups (A-H) in the relay panel network and (2) program softwired dataline switches. Schedules are defined using “Occupied vs. Unoccupied” times to simplify data entry.

2. Timeclock shall include user-selectable intelligent scenarios to handle standard lighting control functions for each channel independently. Selectable scenarios shall include: a. Scheduled ON / Scheduled OFF b. Manual ON / Scheduled OFF c. Astronomical ON / Astronomical OFF (with optional offset) d. Astronomical ON / Scheduled OFF (with optional offset)

3. Each channel can be assigned a standard time delay from 1-256 minutes. During “Occupied” hours, the time delays do not take effect. During “Unoccupied” hours, the time delays will ensure that overridden lights are automatically turned off.

4. Each channel can be assigned an automatic “blinking” of the lights before they are turned off to allow occupants the opportunity to enter an override without being put in the dark. The time interval between the blink warn and “off” operation shall be user configurable between 1 and 15 minutes.

B. Features

1. The timeclock will provide a clear 9-line, 22-character per line display and a simple user interface.

A single button can be used to bring up a context sensitive help screen to assist the user. 2. Timeclock to take into account leap year, daylight savings dates, holidays, and be certified as

“Year 2000 Approved”. 2.5 SOFTWARE

A. Manufacturer shall provide Windows®-based configuration “plug-ins” for system commissioning, programming, monitoring and control. Software shall be capable of functioning with any available LNS network tool.


B. Once the system parameters have been programmed, system shall allow any user-definable feature

(schedules, relay groups, switch assignments) to be field modified without the need for configuration software or systems integration expertise.

2.6 BAS INTEGRATION

A. In addition to hardwired channel inputs, system shall provide for integration to building automation system components including, but not limited to, photocell controllers, HVAC controllers, security, access and fire safety systems without the use of dry contact, gateways or protocol converters. This integration shall be accomplished via network binding of LonMark variables for LNS compliant devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL

A. Install lighting control equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA’s “Standards of Installation”, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Softwired Switches and/or photocells shall be mounted in the spaces as indicated on the Reflected Ceiling Plans. Each low voltage wire shall be labeled clearly indicating which relay panel it connects to. Use only properly color coded, stranded #18 AWG (or larger) wire as indicated on the drawings. All relays and switches shall be tested after installation to confirm proper operation and the loads recorded on the directory card in each panel.

B. The relay panels shall be mounted in electrical closets as indicated on the drawings. The numbered relays

in the panel shall be wired to control the power to each load as indicated on the Panel Wiring Schedules included in the drawings. All power wiring will be identified with the circuit breaker number controlling the load. If multiple circuit breaker panels are feeding into a relay panel, wires shall clearly indicate the originating panel’s designation.

3.3 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all system components.

3.4 TRAINING

A. Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized application engineer to train owner personnel in the operation and programming of the lighting control system.

3.5 DOCUMENTATION

A. Manufacturer shall provide system documentation including:

1. System 1-line showing all panels, number and type of switches, dataline, and network timeclock. 2. Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering. 3. Panel wiring schedules


4. Typical wiring diagrams for each component.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 270740 – 1 Bid Documents

SECTION 270740 – TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:


B. This section is a Division 27 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and 28 sections making reference to telephone and data systems.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of telephone and data systems is indicated by drawings and schedules and is specified herein. Telephone and data systems includes the following:

1. Telephone/data terminal backboards 2. Telephone/data terminal cabinets 3. Outlet Boxes and Raceways 4. Grounding



1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS: NOT REQUIRED.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 TELEPHONE/DATA TERMINAL BACKBOARDS:

A. Provide 4'W x 8'H x 3/4"D, fire-treated or hypalon-coated plywood terminal backboard. Finish with insulating varnish.

2.2 TELEPHONE/DATA TERMINAL CABINETS:

A. Provide terminal cabinets of code gauge steel, flush or surface, as shown, with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinges and flush locks. Paint in color as selected by architect.

2.3 OUTLET BOXES AND RACEWAYS:

A. Provide outlet boxes and raceways in accordance with the following sections.

1. Section 260110 – Conduit Raceways 2. Section 260135 – Electrical Boxes & Fittings 3. Section 260072 – Electrical Support and Seismic Restraints

2.4 GROUNDING:

APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah TELEPHONE AND DATA SYSTEMS 270740 – 2 Bid Documents

A. Provide grounding conductors and accessories in accordance with the following sections:

1. Section 260120 – Conductors and Cables 2. Section 260452 – Grounding

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL:

A. Install telephone/data systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

3.2 RACEWAYS:

A. Unless otherwise noted, extend 3/4" conduit from each telephone/data outlet to accessible ceiling space.

B. Minimum trade size is 3/4". Install a 200 lb. polypropylene pull cord in each empty conduit run.

C. Where raceway systems only are specified, provide blank coverplates for all unused telephone and data outlets.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Extend one #6 bare copper ground conductor from each telephone terminal board and/or cabinet to the service entrance ground bus. Coil 6' of conductor at each terminal backboard and/or cabinet.


APEX Dental Practices Facility – Sandy, Utah DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 280721 – 1 Bid Documents

}

SECTION 280721 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Non-system smoke detectors. 5. Heat detectors. 6. Notification appliances. 7. Addressable interface device. 8. Digital alarm communicator transmitter. 9. System printer.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.


A. Non-coded, addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

B. System shall be UL-listed and factory mutual-approved.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."


}

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each

detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.


}

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same

name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.

H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

I. The disks containing fire alarm files shall be supplied to the owner. These disks shall include all information required to allow the owner to change the fire alarm program themselves. These computer disks shall contain a minimum of the following:

1. CAD drawing files of the building fire alarm map. 2. CAD drawing files of as-build fire alarm component and point-to-point connections. 3. General configuration programming. 4. Job-specific configuration programming. 5. Tutorial file on complete programming of the fire alarm system.

J. The system contractor/supplier shall provide a “Certificate of Compliance” to the Authority Having Jurisdiction in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 72B (1986 Edition), Section 2-2.6, at the completion of operational acceptance tests, as required herein. This will be applicable to all types of fire alarm systems.

K. A complete set of CAD “as-built” drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of equipment shall be delivered to the owner upon completion of the system installation.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II technician

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


}

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

1.10 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 1 unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components. 6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed. 7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.


}

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers / Installers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

Manufacturer

Installer / Telephone

Bosch / Radionics American Security & Fire, Inc. / (801) 263-6002 Cerberus Pyrotronics Siemens / (801) 571-9601 Edwards Systems Technology PST / (801) 649-6696 Wasatch Electric / (801) 487-4511 State Fire Sales and Service / (801) 288-2100 Fire Control Instruments Nelson Fire Systems / (801) 484-9992 Gamewell Nelson Fire Systems / (801) 484-9992 Mircom PCS / (801) 560-6423 Mirtone BEST / (801) 352-0743 Notifier Fire Protection Services Corp. / (801) 363-9696 Silent Knight Alarm Tech / (801) 568-6757 Simplex Grinnell Simplex Grinnell / (801) 262-9406

B. Manufacturers for non-system smoke detectors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gentex Corporation. 2. System Sensor.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. 6. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit. 7. Fire-extinguishing system operation.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. 9. Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.


}

10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 11. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 12. Activate emergency lighting control. 13. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 14. Record events in the system memory. 15. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system. 3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.


}

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two (2) lines of forty (40) characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 6. d. Install no more than 100 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style B. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Y. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 4. d. Install no more than 100 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

3. Serial Interfaces: Two RS-232 ports for printers.

D. Stairwell Pressurization: Provide an output signal using an addressable relay to start the stairwell pressurization system. Signal shall remain on until alarm conditions are cleared and fire-alarm system is reset. Signal shall not stop in response to alarm acknowledge or signal silence commands.

1. Pressurization starts when any alarm is received at fire-alarm control unit. 2. Alarm signals from smoke detectors at pressurization air supplies have a higher priority than other

alarm signals that start the system.

E. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm control unit. 2. Activate an NRTL-listed and -approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit

and detector. 3. Record events by the system printer. 4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

F. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in Temporal Pattern 3.

G. Elevator Recall:

1. Smoke detectors at the following locations shall initiate automatic elevator recall. Alarm-initiating devices, except those listed, shall not start elevator recall.

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor. b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room. c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor.


}

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

H. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in smoke barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted values on system printer.

J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

K. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided in a separate cabinet located in the fire command center or as a special module that is part of fire-alarm control unit.

1. Indicated number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711 and be listed by an NRTL.

a. Allow the application of and evacuation signal to indicated number of zones and, at same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection. c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear." d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by NFPA 72

and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification appliance circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup units, on primary equipment failure.

L. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

M. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.

N. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.


}

1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid. 2. Capacity: Size for all finished and unfinished spaces within building plus twenty-five (25) percent

ampere-hour capacity.

O. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box. 1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral

addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit

lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

4. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors: 1. Detectors shall be two-wire type. 2. Detectors shall have an Integral Addressable Module, arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. Detectors shall also be base-mounted, with the detector and associated electronic components mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

4. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status. 5. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.


}

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

3. This is the default detector type to be used on the product, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:




3. Use this type of detector only when specifically indicated on the drawings.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size,

air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.


}

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

D. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:

1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155. NRTL listed for "regular" service and a standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the cable twist pressure to short- circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.

2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit.

3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified zones.

4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

C. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined with

guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.


}

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

F. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:

1. Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 3. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 4. Mounting: semirecessed. 5. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module, NRTL listed for use in providing a system address for alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.

2.9 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Zone of the supervisory signal. 3. Zone of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power. 5. Low battery. 6. Abnormal test signal. 7. Communication bus failure.

E. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.


}

2.10 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of device. 2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Power for the panel, battery charger, or any other device which affects the operation of the system shall be controlled through a single circuit breaker labeled, “Fire Alarm System – Do Not Turn Off.” Connect to engine generator-supported emergency circuit where available.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install wall-mounted fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

2. Locate fire alarm control unit as directed by the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Raceway: Install fire alarm conductors in raceway. Fire alarm system conductors from different zones may be combined in common conduit. Make certain that raceway and wire quantity, size, and type are suitable for equipment supplied and is within NEC standards. No wiring other than that directly associated with the fire alarm and detection systems shall be permitted inside the fire alarm conduits. All conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes, panels, detectors, alarm devices, etc., shall be mounted and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the system.

E. Loop wires through each device in zone for proper supervision. Tee-taps are not permitted. Wiring splices are to be avoided to the maximum extent possible; if needed, they must be made only in junction boxes. Transposing or changing color-coding of the wires shall not be permitted.

F. Provide dust protection for installed and existing (if any) smoke detectors until finish work is completed and building is ready for occupancy.

G. Protect conductors from cuts, abrasion, and other damage during construction.

H. Minimum conductor size shall be 14 AWG, unless otherwise specified. Shielded and/or stranded conductors shall be provided where recommended by the manufacturer.

I. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing

control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.


}

J. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling

areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

K. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

L. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

M. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

N. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

O. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at +80 inches above finished floor, but not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

P. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn at +80 inches above finished floor, but at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

Q. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

R. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

S. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use mounting arrangement and substrate connection that will resist 100-mph wind load with a gust factor of 1.3 without damage.

T. Do not install manual fire alarm boxes close to light switches.

U. Manual alarm initiating stations shall be provided at all required building exits, boiler rooms, kitchens, and main administrative offices, and elsewhere to provide a maximum 200’ travel distance to a pull station from any point in the building.

V. Post copy of wire identification list inside fire alarm panel door and other area accessible to fire alarm service personnel.

W. The control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for observation and testing.

X. All fire alarm junction boxes shall be identified with zone number and red paint for easy identification.


}

Y. Mount remote multi-signialing accessory for non-system duct smoke detector in a readily accessible location and wire complete.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel.

2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. 3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. 10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-reversal

condition. 11. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

C. All fire detection devices shall be marked in nominal ½” high letters with the zone and device number (for example: a mark reading, “1-20,” indicated Zone 1, Device Number 20).

D. Building Fire Map:

1. A building fire alarm map shall be supplied to the owner, indicating the exact location and address of all individual devices. Install the building map adjacent to the fire alarm panel. Provide a high-quality plastic sign (map holder) with two layers. The back layer shall be painted black. The front layer shall have a clear center for viewing the CAD fire alarm drawing. The edges of the sign shall be colored to match the building interior. The building map shall indicate zoning by the use of five different colors, minimum.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction .


}

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions and Authority Having Jurisdiction.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions and Authority Having Jursidiction.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


}
